1 //===--- ASTContext.cpp - Context to hold long-lived AST nodes ------------===//
2 //
3 //                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4 //
5 // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6 // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
7 //
8 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9 //
10 //  This file implements the ASTContext interface.
11 //
12 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13 
14 #include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h"
15 #include "clang/AST/CharUnits.h"
16 #include "clang/AST/Comment.h"
17 #include "clang/AST/CommentLexer.h"
18 #include "clang/AST/CommentSema.h"
19 #include "clang/AST/CommentParser.h"
20 #include "clang/AST/DeclCXX.h"
21 #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h"
22 #include "clang/AST/DeclTemplate.h"
23 #include "clang/AST/TypeLoc.h"
24 #include "clang/AST/Expr.h"
25 #include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h"
26 #include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h"
27 #include "clang/AST/ASTMutationListener.h"
28 #include "clang/AST/RecordLayout.h"
29 #include "clang/AST/Mangle.h"
30 #include "clang/Basic/Builtins.h"
31 #include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h"
32 #include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h"
33 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h"
34 #include "llvm/ADT/StringExtras.h"
35 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
36 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
37 #include "llvm/Support/Capacity.h"
38 #include "CXXABI.h"
39 #include <map>
40 
41 using namespace clang;
42 
43 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructors;
44 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared;
45 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructors;
46 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared;
47 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructors;
48 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared;
49 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators;
50 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
51 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators;
52 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
53 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructors;
54 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared;
55 
56 enum FloatingRank {
57   HalfRank, FloatRank, DoubleRank, LongDoubleRank
58 };
59 
60 RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(const Decl *D) const {
61   if (!CommentsLoaded && ExternalSource) {
62     ExternalSource->ReadComments();
63     CommentsLoaded = true;
64   }
65 
66   assert(D);
67 
68   // User can not attach documentation to implicit declarations.
69   if (D->isImplicit())
70     return NULL;
71 
72   // TODO: handle comments for function parameters properly.
73   if (isa<ParmVarDecl>(D))
74     return NULL;
75 
76   // TODO: we could look up template parameter documentation in the template
77   // documentation.
78   if (isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(D) ||
79       isa<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(D) ||
80       isa<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(D))
81     return NULL;
82 
83   ArrayRef<RawComment *> RawComments = Comments.getComments();
84 
85   // If there are no comments anywhere, we won't find anything.
86   if (RawComments.empty())
87     return NULL;
88 
89   // Find declaration location.
90   // For Objective-C declarations we generally don't expect to have multiple
91   // declarators, thus use declaration starting location as the "declaration
92   // location".
93   // For all other declarations multiple declarators are used quite frequently,
94   // so we use the location of the identifier as the "declaration location".
95   SourceLocation DeclLoc;
96   if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<ObjCContainerDecl>(D) ||
97       isa<ObjCPropertyDecl>(D) ||
98       isa<RedeclarableTemplateDecl>(D) ||
99       isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D))
100     DeclLoc = D->getLocStart();
101   else
102     DeclLoc = D->getLocation();
103 
104   // If the declaration doesn't map directly to a location in a file, we
105   // can't find the comment.
106   if (DeclLoc.isInvalid() || !DeclLoc.isFileID())
107     return NULL;
108 
109   // Find the comment that occurs just after this declaration.
110   ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator Comment;
111   {
112     // When searching for comments during parsing, the comment we are looking
113     // for is usually among the last two comments we parsed -- check them
114     // first.
115     RawComment CommentAtDeclLoc(SourceMgr, SourceRange(DeclLoc));
116     BeforeThanCompare<RawComment> Compare(SourceMgr);
117     ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator MaybeBeforeDecl = RawComments.end() - 1;
118     bool Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
119     if (!Found && RawComments.size() >= 2) {
120       MaybeBeforeDecl--;
121       Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
122     }
123 
124     if (Found) {
125       Comment = MaybeBeforeDecl + 1;
126       assert(Comment == std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
127                                          &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare));
128     } else {
129       // Slow path.
130       Comment = std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
131                                  &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare);
132     }
133   }
134 
135   // Decompose the location for the declaration and find the beginning of the
136   // file buffer.
137   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> DeclLocDecomp = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc(DeclLoc);
138 
139   // First check whether we have a trailing comment.
140   if (Comment != RawComments.end() &&
141       (*Comment)->isDocumentation() && (*Comment)->isTrailingComment() &&
142       (isa<FieldDecl>(D) || isa<EnumConstantDecl>(D) || isa<VarDecl>(D))) {
143     std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentBeginDecomp
144       = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getBegin());
145     // Check that Doxygen trailing comment comes after the declaration, starts
146     // on the same line and in the same file as the declaration.
147     if (DeclLocDecomp.first == CommentBeginDecomp.first &&
148         SourceMgr.getLineNumber(DeclLocDecomp.first, DeclLocDecomp.second)
149           == SourceMgr.getLineNumber(CommentBeginDecomp.first,
150                                      CommentBeginDecomp.second)) {
151       return *Comment;
152     }
153   }
154 
155   // The comment just after the declaration was not a trailing comment.
156   // Let's look at the previous comment.
157   if (Comment == RawComments.begin())
158     return NULL;
159   --Comment;
160 
161   // Check that we actually have a non-member Doxygen comment.
162   if (!(*Comment)->isDocumentation() || (*Comment)->isTrailingComment())
163     return NULL;
164 
165   // Decompose the end of the comment.
166   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentEndDecomp
167     = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getEnd());
168 
169   // If the comment and the declaration aren't in the same file, then they
170   // aren't related.
171   if (DeclLocDecomp.first != CommentEndDecomp.first)
172     return NULL;
173 
174   // Get the corresponding buffer.
175   bool Invalid = false;
176   const char *Buffer = SourceMgr.getBufferData(DeclLocDecomp.first,
177                                                &Invalid).data();
178   if (Invalid)
179     return NULL;
180 
181   // Extract text between the comment and declaration.
182   StringRef Text(Buffer + CommentEndDecomp.second,
183                  DeclLocDecomp.second - CommentEndDecomp.second);
184 
185   // There should be no other declarations or preprocessor directives between
186   // comment and declaration.
187   if (Text.find_first_of(",;{}#@") != StringRef::npos)
188     return NULL;
189 
190   return *Comment;
191 }
192 
193 const RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForDecl(const Decl *D) const {
194   // Check whether we have cached a comment string for this declaration
195   // already.
196   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawAndParsedComment>::iterator Pos
197       = DeclComments.find(D);
198   if (Pos != DeclComments.end()) {
199     RawAndParsedComment C = Pos->second;
200     return C.first;
201   }
202 
203   RawComment *RC = getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(D);
204   // If we found a comment, it should be a documentation comment.
205   assert(!RC || RC->isDocumentation());
206   DeclComments[D] =
207       RawAndParsedComment(RC, static_cast<comments::FullComment *>(NULL));
208   if (RC)
209     RC->setAttached();
210   return RC;
211 }
212 
213 comments::FullComment *ASTContext::getCommentForDecl(const Decl *D) const {
214   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawAndParsedComment>::iterator Pos
215       = DeclComments.find(D);
216   const RawComment *RC;
217   if (Pos != DeclComments.end()) {
218     RawAndParsedComment C = Pos->second;
219     if (comments::FullComment *FC = C.second)
220       return FC;
221     RC = C.first;
222   } else
223     RC = getRawCommentForDecl(D);
224 
225   if (!RC)
226     return NULL;
227 
228   const StringRef RawText = RC->getRawText(SourceMgr);
229   comments::Lexer L(getAllocator(),
230                     RC->getSourceRange().getBegin(), comments::CommentOptions(),
231                     RawText.begin(), RawText.end());
232 
233   comments::Sema S(getAllocator(), getSourceManager(), getDiagnostics());
234   S.setDecl(D);
235   comments::Parser P(L, S, getAllocator(), getSourceManager(),
236                      getDiagnostics());
237 
238   comments::FullComment *FC = P.parseFullComment();
239   DeclComments[D].second = FC;
240   return FC;
241 }
242 
243 void
244 ASTContext::CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID,
245                                                TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Parm) {
246   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getDepth());
247   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getPosition());
248   ID.AddBoolean(Parm->isParameterPack());
249 
250   TemplateParameterList *Params = Parm->getTemplateParameters();
251   ID.AddInteger(Params->size());
252   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
253                                           PEnd = Params->end();
254        P != PEnd; ++P) {
255     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) {
256       ID.AddInteger(0);
257       ID.AddBoolean(TTP->isParameterPack());
258       continue;
259     }
260 
261     if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
262       ID.AddInteger(1);
263       ID.AddBoolean(NTTP->isParameterPack());
264       ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getType().getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
265       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
266         ID.AddBoolean(true);
267         ID.AddInteger(NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes());
268         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
269           QualType T = NTTP->getExpansionType(I);
270           ID.AddPointer(T.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
271         }
272       } else
273         ID.AddBoolean(false);
274       continue;
275     }
276 
277     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP = cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P);
278     ID.AddInteger(2);
279     Profile(ID, TTP);
280   }
281 }
282 
283 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *
284 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
285                                           TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP) const {
286   // Check if we already have a canonical template template parameter.
287   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
288   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(ID, TTP);
289   void *InsertPos = 0;
290   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm *Canonical
291     = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
292   if (Canonical)
293     return Canonical->getParam();
294 
295   // Build a canonical template parameter list.
296   TemplateParameterList *Params = TTP->getTemplateParameters();
297   SmallVector<NamedDecl *, 4> CanonParams;
298   CanonParams.reserve(Params->size());
299   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
300                                           PEnd = Params->end();
301        P != PEnd; ++P) {
302     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P))
303       CanonParams.push_back(
304                   TemplateTypeParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
305                                                SourceLocation(),
306                                                SourceLocation(),
307                                                TTP->getDepth(),
308                                                TTP->getIndex(), 0, false,
309                                                TTP->isParameterPack()));
310     else if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP
311              = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
312       QualType T = getCanonicalType(NTTP->getType());
313       TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
314       NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *Param;
315       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
316         SmallVector<QualType, 2> ExpandedTypes;
317         SmallVector<TypeSourceInfo *, 2> ExpandedTInfos;
318         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
319           ExpandedTypes.push_back(getCanonicalType(NTTP->getExpansionType(I)));
320           ExpandedTInfos.push_back(
321                                 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(ExpandedTypes.back()));
322         }
323 
324         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
325                                                 SourceLocation(),
326                                                 SourceLocation(),
327                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
328                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
329                                                 T,
330                                                 TInfo,
331                                                 ExpandedTypes.data(),
332                                                 ExpandedTypes.size(),
333                                                 ExpandedTInfos.data());
334       } else {
335         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
336                                                 SourceLocation(),
337                                                 SourceLocation(),
338                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
339                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
340                                                 T,
341                                                 NTTP->isParameterPack(),
342                                                 TInfo);
343       }
344       CanonParams.push_back(Param);
345 
346     } else
347       CanonParams.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
348                                            cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P)));
349   }
350 
351   TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonTTP
352     = TemplateTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
353                                        SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(),
354                                        TTP->getPosition(),
355                                        TTP->isParameterPack(),
356                                        0,
357                          TemplateParameterList::Create(*this, SourceLocation(),
358                                                        SourceLocation(),
359                                                        CanonParams.data(),
360                                                        CanonParams.size(),
361                                                        SourceLocation()));
362 
363   // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
364   Canonical = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
365   assert(Canonical == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!");
366   (void)Canonical;
367 
368   // Create the canonical template template parameter entry.
369   Canonical = new (*this) CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm(CanonTTP);
370   CanonTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(Canonical, InsertPos);
371   return CanonTTP;
372 }
373 
374 CXXABI *ASTContext::createCXXABI(const TargetInfo &T) {
375   if (!LangOpts.CPlusPlus) return 0;
376 
377   switch (T.getCXXABI()) {
378   case CXXABI_ARM:
379     return CreateARMCXXABI(*this);
380   case CXXABI_Itanium:
381     return CreateItaniumCXXABI(*this);
382   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
383     return CreateMicrosoftCXXABI(*this);
384   }
385   llvm_unreachable("Invalid CXXABI type!");
386 }
387 
388 static const LangAS::Map *getAddressSpaceMap(const TargetInfo &T,
389                                              const LangOptions &LOpts) {
390   if (LOpts.FakeAddressSpaceMap) {
391     // The fake address space map must have a distinct entry for each
392     // language-specific address space.
393     static const unsigned FakeAddrSpaceMap[] = {
394       1, // opencl_global
395       2, // opencl_local
396       3, // opencl_constant
397       4, // cuda_device
398       5, // cuda_constant
399       6  // cuda_shared
400     };
401     return &FakeAddrSpaceMap;
402   } else {
403     return &T.getAddressSpaceMap();
404   }
405 }
406 
407 ASTContext::ASTContext(LangOptions& LOpts, SourceManager &SM,
408                        const TargetInfo *t,
409                        IdentifierTable &idents, SelectorTable &sels,
410                        Builtin::Context &builtins,
411                        unsigned size_reserve,
412                        bool DelayInitialization)
413   : FunctionProtoTypes(this_()),
414     TemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
415     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
416     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks(this_()),
417     GlobalNestedNameSpecifier(0),
418     Int128Decl(0), UInt128Decl(0),
419     BuiltinVaListDecl(0),
420     ObjCIdDecl(0), ObjCSelDecl(0), ObjCClassDecl(0), ObjCProtocolClassDecl(0),
421     CFConstantStringTypeDecl(0), ObjCInstanceTypeDecl(0),
422     FILEDecl(0),
423     jmp_bufDecl(0), sigjmp_bufDecl(0), ucontext_tDecl(0),
424     BlockDescriptorType(0), BlockDescriptorExtendedType(0),
425     cudaConfigureCallDecl(0),
426     NullTypeSourceInfo(QualType()),
427     FirstLocalImport(), LastLocalImport(),
428     SourceMgr(SM), LangOpts(LOpts),
429     AddrSpaceMap(0), Target(t), PrintingPolicy(LOpts),
430     Idents(idents), Selectors(sels),
431     BuiltinInfo(builtins),
432     DeclarationNames(*this),
433     ExternalSource(0), Listener(0),
434     Comments(SM), CommentsLoaded(false),
435     LastSDM(0, 0),
436     UniqueBlockByRefTypeID(0)
437 {
438   if (size_reserve > 0) Types.reserve(size_reserve);
439   TUDecl = TranslationUnitDecl::Create(*this);
440 
441   if (!DelayInitialization) {
442     assert(t && "No target supplied for ASTContext initialization");
443     InitBuiltinTypes(*t);
444   }
445 }
446 
447 ASTContext::~ASTContext() {
448   // Release the DenseMaps associated with DeclContext objects.
449   // FIXME: Is this the ideal solution?
450   ReleaseDeclContextMaps();
451 
452   // Call all of the deallocation functions.
453   for (unsigned I = 0, N = Deallocations.size(); I != N; ++I)
454     Deallocations[I].first(Deallocations[I].second);
455 
456   // ASTRecordLayout objects in ASTRecordLayouts must always be destroyed
457   // because they can contain DenseMaps.
458   for (llvm::DenseMap<const ObjCContainerDecl*,
459        const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
460        I = ObjCLayouts.begin(), E = ObjCLayouts.end(); I != E; )
461     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
462     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
463       R->Destroy(*this);
464 
465   for (llvm::DenseMap<const RecordDecl*, const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
466        I = ASTRecordLayouts.begin(), E = ASTRecordLayouts.end(); I != E; ) {
467     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
468     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
469       R->Destroy(*this);
470   }
471 
472   for (llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator A = DeclAttrs.begin(),
473                                                     AEnd = DeclAttrs.end();
474        A != AEnd; ++A)
475     A->second->~AttrVec();
476 }
477 
478 void ASTContext::AddDeallocation(void (*Callback)(void*), void *Data) {
479   Deallocations.push_back(std::make_pair(Callback, Data));
480 }
481 
482 void
483 ASTContext::setExternalSource(OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> &Source) {
484   ExternalSource.reset(Source.take());
485 }
486 
487 void ASTContext::PrintStats() const {
488   llvm::errs() << "\n*** AST Context Stats:\n";
489   llvm::errs() << "  " << Types.size() << " types total.\n";
490 
491   unsigned counts[] = {
492 #define TYPE(Name, Parent) 0,
493 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
494 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
495     0 // Extra
496   };
497 
498   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Types.size(); i != e; ++i) {
499     Type *T = Types[i];
500     counts[(unsigned)T->getTypeClass()]++;
501   }
502 
503   unsigned Idx = 0;
504   unsigned TotalBytes = 0;
505 #define TYPE(Name, Parent)                                              \
506   if (counts[Idx])                                                      \
507     llvm::errs() << "    " << counts[Idx] << " " << #Name               \
508                  << " types\n";                                         \
509   TotalBytes += counts[Idx] * sizeof(Name##Type);                       \
510   ++Idx;
511 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
512 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
513 
514   llvm::errs() << "Total bytes = " << TotalBytes << "\n";
515 
516   // Implicit special member functions.
517   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared << "/"
518                << NumImplicitDefaultConstructors
519                << " implicit default constructors created\n";
520   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared << "/"
521                << NumImplicitCopyConstructors
522                << " implicit copy constructors created\n";
523   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
524     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared << "/"
525                  << NumImplicitMoveConstructors
526                  << " implicit move constructors created\n";
527   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
528                << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators
529                << " implicit copy assignment operators created\n";
530   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
531     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
532                  << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators
533                  << " implicit move assignment operators created\n";
534   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared << "/"
535                << NumImplicitDestructors
536                << " implicit destructors created\n";
537 
538   if (ExternalSource.get()) {
539     llvm::errs() << "\n";
540     ExternalSource->PrintStats();
541   }
542 
543   BumpAlloc.PrintStats();
544 }
545 
546 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getInt128Decl() const {
547   if (!Int128Decl) {
548     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Int128Ty);
549     Int128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
550                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
551                                      SourceLocation(),
552                                      SourceLocation(),
553                                      &Idents.get("__int128_t"),
554                                      TInfo);
555   }
556 
557   return Int128Decl;
558 }
559 
560 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getUInt128Decl() const {
561   if (!UInt128Decl) {
562     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(UnsignedInt128Ty);
563     UInt128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
564                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
565                                      SourceLocation(),
566                                      SourceLocation(),
567                                      &Idents.get("__uint128_t"),
568                                      TInfo);
569   }
570 
571   return UInt128Decl;
572 }
573 
574 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinType(CanQualType &R, BuiltinType::Kind K) {
575   BuiltinType *Ty = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BuiltinType(K);
576   R = CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(QualType(Ty, 0));
577   Types.push_back(Ty);
578 }
579 
580 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinTypes(const TargetInfo &Target) {
581   assert((!this->Target || this->Target == &Target) &&
582          "Incorrect target reinitialization");
583   assert(VoidTy.isNull() && "Context reinitialized?");
584 
585   this->Target = &Target;
586 
587   ABI.reset(createCXXABI(Target));
588   AddrSpaceMap = getAddressSpaceMap(Target, LangOpts);
589 
590   // C99 6.2.5p19.
591   InitBuiltinType(VoidTy,              BuiltinType::Void);
592 
593   // C99 6.2.5p2.
594   InitBuiltinType(BoolTy,              BuiltinType::Bool);
595   // C99 6.2.5p3.
596   if (LangOpts.CharIsSigned)
597     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_S);
598   else
599     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_U);
600   // C99 6.2.5p4.
601   InitBuiltinType(SignedCharTy,        BuiltinType::SChar);
602   InitBuiltinType(ShortTy,             BuiltinType::Short);
603   InitBuiltinType(IntTy,               BuiltinType::Int);
604   InitBuiltinType(LongTy,              BuiltinType::Long);
605   InitBuiltinType(LongLongTy,          BuiltinType::LongLong);
606 
607   // C99 6.2.5p6.
608   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedCharTy,      BuiltinType::UChar);
609   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedShortTy,     BuiltinType::UShort);
610   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedIntTy,       BuiltinType::UInt);
611   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongTy,      BuiltinType::ULong);
612   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongLongTy,  BuiltinType::ULongLong);
613 
614   // C99 6.2.5p10.
615   InitBuiltinType(FloatTy,             BuiltinType::Float);
616   InitBuiltinType(DoubleTy,            BuiltinType::Double);
617   InitBuiltinType(LongDoubleTy,        BuiltinType::LongDouble);
618 
619   // GNU extension, 128-bit integers.
620   InitBuiltinType(Int128Ty,            BuiltinType::Int128);
621   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedInt128Ty,    BuiltinType::UInt128);
622 
623   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) { // C++ 3.9.1p5
624     if (TargetInfo::isTypeSigned(Target.getWCharType()))
625       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_S);
626     else  // -fshort-wchar makes wchar_t be unsigned.
627       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_U);
628   } else // C99
629     WCharTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType());
630 
631   WIntTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWIntType());
632 
633   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
634     InitBuiltinType(Char16Ty,           BuiltinType::Char16);
635   else // C99
636     Char16Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type());
637 
638   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
639     InitBuiltinType(Char32Ty,           BuiltinType::Char32);
640   else // C99
641     Char32Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type());
642 
643   // Placeholder type for type-dependent expressions whose type is
644   // completely unknown. No code should ever check a type against
645   // DependentTy and users should never see it; however, it is here to
646   // help diagnose failures to properly check for type-dependent
647   // expressions.
648   InitBuiltinType(DependentTy,         BuiltinType::Dependent);
649 
650   // Placeholder type for functions.
651   InitBuiltinType(OverloadTy,          BuiltinType::Overload);
652 
653   // Placeholder type for bound members.
654   InitBuiltinType(BoundMemberTy,       BuiltinType::BoundMember);
655 
656   // Placeholder type for pseudo-objects.
657   InitBuiltinType(PseudoObjectTy,      BuiltinType::PseudoObject);
658 
659   // "any" type; useful for debugger-like clients.
660   InitBuiltinType(UnknownAnyTy,        BuiltinType::UnknownAny);
661 
662   // Placeholder type for unbridged ARC casts.
663   InitBuiltinType(ARCUnbridgedCastTy,  BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast);
664 
665   // C99 6.2.5p11.
666   FloatComplexTy      = getComplexType(FloatTy);
667   DoubleComplexTy     = getComplexType(DoubleTy);
668   LongDoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(LongDoubleTy);
669 
670   // Builtin types for 'id', 'Class', and 'SEL'.
671   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, BuiltinType::ObjCId);
672   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, BuiltinType::ObjCClass);
673   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy, BuiltinType::ObjCSel);
674 
675   // Builtin type for __objc_yes and __objc_no
676   ObjCBuiltinBoolTy = (Target.useSignedCharForObjCBool() ?
677                        SignedCharTy : BoolTy);
678 
679   ObjCConstantStringType = QualType();
680 
681   // void * type
682   VoidPtrTy = getPointerType(VoidTy);
683 
684   // nullptr type (C++0x 2.14.7)
685   InitBuiltinType(NullPtrTy,           BuiltinType::NullPtr);
686 
687   // half type (OpenCL 6.1.1.1) / ARM NEON __fp16
688   InitBuiltinType(HalfTy, BuiltinType::Half);
689 
690   // Builtin type used to help define __builtin_va_list.
691   VaListTagTy = QualType();
692 }
693 
694 DiagnosticsEngine &ASTContext::getDiagnostics() const {
695   return SourceMgr.getDiagnostics();
696 }
697 
698 AttrVec& ASTContext::getDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
699   AttrVec *&Result = DeclAttrs[D];
700   if (!Result) {
701     void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(AttrVec));
702     Result = new (Mem) AttrVec;
703   }
704 
705   return *Result;
706 }
707 
708 /// \brief Erase the attributes corresponding to the given declaration.
709 void ASTContext::eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
710   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator Pos = DeclAttrs.find(D);
711   if (Pos != DeclAttrs.end()) {
712     Pos->second->~AttrVec();
713     DeclAttrs.erase(Pos);
714   }
715 }
716 
717 MemberSpecializationInfo *
718 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl *Var) {
719   assert(Var->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
720   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl *, MemberSpecializationInfo *>::iterator Pos
721     = InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.find(Var);
722   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.end())
723     return 0;
724 
725   return Pos->second;
726 }
727 
728 void
729 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl *Inst, VarDecl *Tmpl,
730                                                 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK,
731                                           SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation) {
732   assert(Inst->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
733   assert(Tmpl->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
734   assert(!InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst] &&
735          "Already noted what static data member was instantiated from");
736   InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst]
737     = new (*this) MemberSpecializationInfo(Tmpl, TSK, PointOfInstantiation);
738 }
739 
740 FunctionDecl *ASTContext::getClassScopeSpecializationPattern(
741                                                      const FunctionDecl *FD){
742   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
743   llvm::DenseMap<const FunctionDecl*, FunctionDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
744     = ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.find(FD);
745   if (Pos == ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.end())
746     return 0;
747 
748   return Pos->second;
749 }
750 
751 void ASTContext::setClassScopeSpecializationPattern(FunctionDecl *FD,
752                                         FunctionDecl *Pattern) {
753   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
754   assert(Pattern && "Class scope specialization pattern is 0");
755   ClassScopeSpecializationPattern[FD] = Pattern;
756 }
757 
758 NamedDecl *
759 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *UUD) {
760   llvm::DenseMap<UsingDecl *, NamedDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
761     = InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.find(UUD);
762   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.end())
763     return 0;
764 
765   return Pos->second;
766 }
767 
768 void
769 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *Inst, NamedDecl *Pattern) {
770   assert((isa<UsingDecl>(Pattern) ||
771           isa<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(Pattern) ||
772           isa<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Pattern)) &&
773          "pattern decl is not a using decl");
774   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
775   InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
776 }
777 
778 UsingShadowDecl *
779 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst) {
780   llvm::DenseMap<UsingShadowDecl*, UsingShadowDecl*>::const_iterator Pos
781     = InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.find(Inst);
782   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.end())
783     return 0;
784 
785   return Pos->second;
786 }
787 
788 void
789 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst,
790                                                UsingShadowDecl *Pattern) {
791   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
792   InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
793 }
794 
795 FieldDecl *ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Field) {
796   llvm::DenseMap<FieldDecl *, FieldDecl *>::iterator Pos
797     = InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.find(Field);
798   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.end())
799     return 0;
800 
801   return Pos->second;
802 }
803 
804 void ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Inst,
805                                                      FieldDecl *Tmpl) {
806   assert(!Inst->getDeclName() && "Instantiated field decl is not unnamed");
807   assert(!Tmpl->getDeclName() && "Template field decl is not unnamed");
808   assert(!InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] &&
809          "Already noted what unnamed field was instantiated from");
810 
811   InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] = Tmpl;
812 }
813 
814 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
815                                     const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
816   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
817           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0);
818 }
819 
820 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
821                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
822   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
823           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0 &&
824           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this) != 0);
825 }
826 
827 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
828                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
829   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
830           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) &&
831           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
832 }
833 
834 bool ASTContext::NonBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
835                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
836   return (!FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
837           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
838 }
839 
840 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
841                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
842   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
843           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
844 }
845 
846 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
847 ASTContext::overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
848   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
849     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
850   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
851     return 0;
852 
853   return Pos->second.begin();
854 }
855 
856 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
857 ASTContext::overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
858   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
859     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
860   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
861     return 0;
862 
863   return Pos->second.end();
864 }
865 
866 unsigned
867 ASTContext::overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
868   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
869     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
870   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
871     return 0;
872 
873   return Pos->second.size();
874 }
875 
876 void ASTContext::addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl *Method,
877                                      const CXXMethodDecl *Overridden) {
878   OverriddenMethods[Method].push_back(Overridden);
879 }
880 
881 void ASTContext::addedLocalImportDecl(ImportDecl *Import) {
882   assert(!Import->NextLocalImport && "Import declaration already in the chain");
883   assert(!Import->isFromASTFile() && "Non-local import declaration");
884   if (!FirstLocalImport) {
885     FirstLocalImport = Import;
886     LastLocalImport = Import;
887     return;
888   }
889 
890   LastLocalImport->NextLocalImport = Import;
891   LastLocalImport = Import;
892 }
893 
894 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
895 //                         Type Sizing and Analysis
896 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
897 
898 /// getFloatTypeSemantics - Return the APFloat 'semantics' for the specified
899 /// scalar floating point type.
900 const llvm::fltSemantics &ASTContext::getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const {
901   const BuiltinType *BT = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
902   assert(BT && "Not a floating point type!");
903   switch (BT->getKind()) {
904   default: llvm_unreachable("Not a floating point type!");
905   case BuiltinType::Half:       return Target->getHalfFormat();
906   case BuiltinType::Float:      return Target->getFloatFormat();
907   case BuiltinType::Double:     return Target->getDoubleFormat();
908   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return Target->getLongDoubleFormat();
909   }
910 }
911 
912 /// getDeclAlign - Return a conservative estimate of the alignment of the
913 /// specified decl.  Note that bitfields do not have a valid alignment, so
914 /// this method will assert on them.
915 /// If @p RefAsPointee, references are treated like their underlying type
916 /// (for alignof), else they're treated like pointers (for CodeGen).
917 CharUnits ASTContext::getDeclAlign(const Decl *D, bool RefAsPointee) const {
918   unsigned Align = Target->getCharWidth();
919 
920   bool UseAlignAttrOnly = false;
921   if (unsigned AlignFromAttr = D->getMaxAlignment()) {
922     Align = AlignFromAttr;
923 
924     // __attribute__((aligned)) can increase or decrease alignment
925     // *except* on a struct or struct member, where it only increases
926     // alignment unless 'packed' is also specified.
927     //
928     // It is an error for alignas to decrease alignment, so we can
929     // ignore that possibility;  Sema should diagnose it.
930     if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) {
931       UseAlignAttrOnly = D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
932         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
933     } else {
934       UseAlignAttrOnly = true;
935     }
936   }
937   else if (isa<FieldDecl>(D))
938       UseAlignAttrOnly =
939         D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
940         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
941 
942   // If we're using the align attribute only, just ignore everything
943   // else about the declaration and its type.
944   if (UseAlignAttrOnly) {
945     // do nothing
946 
947   } else if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D)) {
948     QualType T = VD->getType();
949     if (const ReferenceType* RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) {
950       if (RefAsPointee)
951         T = RT->getPointeeType();
952       else
953         T = getPointerType(RT->getPointeeType());
954     }
955     if (!T->isIncompleteType() && !T->isFunctionType()) {
956       // Adjust alignments of declarations with array type by the
957       // large-array alignment on the target.
958       unsigned MinWidth = Target->getLargeArrayMinWidth();
959       const ArrayType *arrayType;
960       if (MinWidth && (arrayType = getAsArrayType(T))) {
961         if (isa<VariableArrayType>(arrayType))
962           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
963         else if (isa<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType) &&
964                  MinWidth <= getTypeSize(cast<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType)))
965           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
966 
967         // Walk through any array types while we're at it.
968         T = getBaseElementType(arrayType);
969       }
970       Align = std::max(Align, getPreferredTypeAlign(T.getTypePtr()));
971     }
972 
973     // Fields can be subject to extra alignment constraints, like if
974     // the field is packed, the struct is packed, or the struct has a
975     // a max-field-alignment constraint (#pragma pack).  So calculate
976     // the actual alignment of the field within the struct, and then
977     // (as we're expected to) constrain that by the alignment of the type.
978     if (const FieldDecl *field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(VD)) {
979       // So calculate the alignment of the field.
980       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(field->getParent());
981 
982       // Start with the record's overall alignment.
983       unsigned fieldAlign = toBits(layout.getAlignment());
984 
985       // Use the GCD of that and the offset within the record.
986       uint64_t offset = layout.getFieldOffset(field->getFieldIndex());
987       if (offset > 0) {
988         // Alignment is always a power of 2, so the GCD will be a power of 2,
989         // which means we get to do this crazy thing instead of Euclid's.
990         uint64_t lowBitOfOffset = offset & (~offset + 1);
991         if (lowBitOfOffset < fieldAlign)
992           fieldAlign = static_cast<unsigned>(lowBitOfOffset);
993       }
994 
995       Align = std::min(Align, fieldAlign);
996     }
997   }
998 
999   return toCharUnitsFromBits(Align);
1000 }
1001 
1002 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1003 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(const Type *T) const {
1004   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfo(T);
1005   return std::make_pair(toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.first),
1006                         toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.second));
1007 }
1008 
1009 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1010 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) const {
1011   return getTypeInfoInChars(T.getTypePtr());
1012 }
1013 
1014 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> ASTContext::getTypeInfo(const Type *T) const {
1015   TypeInfoMap::iterator it = MemoizedTypeInfo.find(T);
1016   if (it != MemoizedTypeInfo.end())
1017     return it->second;
1018 
1019   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfoImpl(T);
1020   MemoizedTypeInfo.insert(std::make_pair(T, Info));
1021   return Info;
1022 }
1023 
1024 /// getTypeInfoImpl - Return the size of the specified type, in bits.  This
1025 /// method does not work on incomplete types.
1026 ///
1027 /// FIXME: Pointers into different addr spaces could have different sizes and
1028 /// alignment requirements: getPointerInfo should take an AddrSpace, this
1029 /// should take a QualType, &c.
1030 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned>
1031 ASTContext::getTypeInfoImpl(const Type *T) const {
1032   uint64_t Width=0;
1033   unsigned Align=8;
1034   switch (T->getTypeClass()) {
1035 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
1036 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
1037 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base)
1038 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
1039 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
1040     llvm_unreachable("Should not see dependent types");
1041 
1042   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
1043   case Type::FunctionProto:
1044     // GCC extension: alignof(function) = 32 bits
1045     Width = 0;
1046     Align = 32;
1047     break;
1048 
1049   case Type::IncompleteArray:
1050   case Type::VariableArray:
1051     Width = 0;
1052     Align = getTypeAlign(cast<ArrayType>(T)->getElementType());
1053     break;
1054 
1055   case Type::ConstantArray: {
1056     const ConstantArrayType *CAT = cast<ConstantArrayType>(T);
1057 
1058     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(CAT->getElementType());
1059     uint64_t Size = CAT->getSize().getZExtValue();
1060     assert((Size == 0 || EltInfo.first <= (uint64_t)(-1)/Size) &&
1061            "Overflow in array type bit size evaluation");
1062     Width = EltInfo.first*Size;
1063     Align = EltInfo.second;
1064     Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1065     break;
1066   }
1067   case Type::ExtVector:
1068   case Type::Vector: {
1069     const VectorType *VT = cast<VectorType>(T);
1070     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(VT->getElementType());
1071     Width = EltInfo.first*VT->getNumElements();
1072     Align = Width;
1073     // If the alignment is not a power of 2, round up to the next power of 2.
1074     // This happens for non-power-of-2 length vectors.
1075     if (Align & (Align-1)) {
1076       Align = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Align);
1077       Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1078     }
1079     // Adjust the alignment based on the target max.
1080     uint64_t TargetVectorAlign = Target->getMaxVectorAlign();
1081     if (TargetVectorAlign && TargetVectorAlign < Align)
1082       Align = TargetVectorAlign;
1083     break;
1084   }
1085 
1086   case Type::Builtin:
1087     switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
1088     default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type!");
1089     case BuiltinType::Void:
1090       // GCC extension: alignof(void) = 8 bits.
1091       Width = 0;
1092       Align = 8;
1093       break;
1094 
1095     case BuiltinType::Bool:
1096       Width = Target->getBoolWidth();
1097       Align = Target->getBoolAlign();
1098       break;
1099     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
1100     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
1101     case BuiltinType::UChar:
1102     case BuiltinType::SChar:
1103       Width = Target->getCharWidth();
1104       Align = Target->getCharAlign();
1105       break;
1106     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
1107     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
1108       Width = Target->getWCharWidth();
1109       Align = Target->getWCharAlign();
1110       break;
1111     case BuiltinType::Char16:
1112       Width = Target->getChar16Width();
1113       Align = Target->getChar16Align();
1114       break;
1115     case BuiltinType::Char32:
1116       Width = Target->getChar32Width();
1117       Align = Target->getChar32Align();
1118       break;
1119     case BuiltinType::UShort:
1120     case BuiltinType::Short:
1121       Width = Target->getShortWidth();
1122       Align = Target->getShortAlign();
1123       break;
1124     case BuiltinType::UInt:
1125     case BuiltinType::Int:
1126       Width = Target->getIntWidth();
1127       Align = Target->getIntAlign();
1128       break;
1129     case BuiltinType::ULong:
1130     case BuiltinType::Long:
1131       Width = Target->getLongWidth();
1132       Align = Target->getLongAlign();
1133       break;
1134     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
1135     case BuiltinType::LongLong:
1136       Width = Target->getLongLongWidth();
1137       Align = Target->getLongLongAlign();
1138       break;
1139     case BuiltinType::Int128:
1140     case BuiltinType::UInt128:
1141       Width = 128;
1142       Align = 128; // int128_t is 128-bit aligned on all targets.
1143       break;
1144     case BuiltinType::Half:
1145       Width = Target->getHalfWidth();
1146       Align = Target->getHalfAlign();
1147       break;
1148     case BuiltinType::Float:
1149       Width = Target->getFloatWidth();
1150       Align = Target->getFloatAlign();
1151       break;
1152     case BuiltinType::Double:
1153       Width = Target->getDoubleWidth();
1154       Align = Target->getDoubleAlign();
1155       break;
1156     case BuiltinType::LongDouble:
1157       Width = Target->getLongDoubleWidth();
1158       Align = Target->getLongDoubleAlign();
1159       break;
1160     case BuiltinType::NullPtr:
1161       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); // C++ 3.9.1p11: sizeof(nullptr_t)
1162       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); //   == sizeof(void*)
1163       break;
1164     case BuiltinType::ObjCId:
1165     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass:
1166     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel:
1167       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1168       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1169       break;
1170     }
1171     break;
1172   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
1173     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1174     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1175     break;
1176   case Type::BlockPointer: {
1177     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1178         cast<BlockPointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1179     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1180     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1181     break;
1182   }
1183   case Type::LValueReference:
1184   case Type::RValueReference: {
1185     // alignof and sizeof should never enter this code path here, so we go
1186     // the pointer route.
1187     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1188         cast<ReferenceType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1189     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1190     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1191     break;
1192   }
1193   case Type::Pointer: {
1194     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(cast<PointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1195     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1196     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1197     break;
1198   }
1199   case Type::MemberPointer: {
1200     const MemberPointerType *MPT = cast<MemberPointerType>(T);
1201     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> PtrDiffInfo =
1202       getTypeInfo(getPointerDiffType());
1203     Width = PtrDiffInfo.first * ABI->getMemberPointerSize(MPT);
1204     Align = PtrDiffInfo.second;
1205     break;
1206   }
1207   case Type::Complex: {
1208     // Complex types have the same alignment as their elements, but twice the
1209     // size.
1210     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo =
1211       getTypeInfo(cast<ComplexType>(T)->getElementType());
1212     Width = EltInfo.first*2;
1213     Align = EltInfo.second;
1214     break;
1215   }
1216   case Type::ObjCObject:
1217     return getTypeInfo(cast<ObjCObjectType>(T)->getBaseType().getTypePtr());
1218   case Type::ObjCInterface: {
1219     const ObjCInterfaceType *ObjCI = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(T);
1220     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(ObjCI->getDecl());
1221     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1222     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1223     break;
1224   }
1225   case Type::Record:
1226   case Type::Enum: {
1227     const TagType *TT = cast<TagType>(T);
1228 
1229     if (TT->getDecl()->isInvalidDecl()) {
1230       Width = 8;
1231       Align = 8;
1232       break;
1233     }
1234 
1235     if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(TT))
1236       return getTypeInfo(ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType());
1237 
1238     const RecordType *RT = cast<RecordType>(TT);
1239     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1240     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1241     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1242     break;
1243   }
1244 
1245   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParm:
1246     return getTypeInfo(cast<SubstTemplateTypeParmType>(T)->
1247                        getReplacementType().getTypePtr());
1248 
1249   case Type::Auto: {
1250     const AutoType *A = cast<AutoType>(T);
1251     assert(A->isDeduced() && "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1252     return getTypeInfo(A->getDeducedType().getTypePtr());
1253   }
1254 
1255   case Type::Paren:
1256     return getTypeInfo(cast<ParenType>(T)->getInnerType().getTypePtr());
1257 
1258   case Type::Typedef: {
1259     const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = cast<TypedefType>(T)->getDecl();
1260     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1261       = getTypeInfo(Typedef->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1262     // If the typedef has an aligned attribute on it, it overrides any computed
1263     // alignment we have.  This violates the GCC documentation (which says that
1264     // attribute(aligned) can only round up) but matches its implementation.
1265     if (unsigned AttrAlign = Typedef->getMaxAlignment())
1266       Align = AttrAlign;
1267     else
1268       Align = Info.second;
1269     Width = Info.first;
1270     break;
1271   }
1272 
1273   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
1274     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfExprType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1275                          .getTypePtr());
1276 
1277   case Type::TypeOf:
1278     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfType>(T)->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1279 
1280   case Type::Decltype:
1281     return getTypeInfo(cast<DecltypeType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1282                         .getTypePtr());
1283 
1284   case Type::UnaryTransform:
1285     return getTypeInfo(cast<UnaryTransformType>(T)->getUnderlyingType());
1286 
1287   case Type::Elaborated:
1288     return getTypeInfo(cast<ElaboratedType>(T)->getNamedType().getTypePtr());
1289 
1290   case Type::Attributed:
1291     return getTypeInfo(
1292                   cast<AttributedType>(T)->getEquivalentType().getTypePtr());
1293 
1294   case Type::TemplateSpecialization: {
1295     assert(getCanonicalType(T) != T &&
1296            "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1297     const TemplateSpecializationType *TST = cast<TemplateSpecializationType>(T);
1298     // A type alias template specialization may refer to a typedef with the
1299     // aligned attribute on it.
1300     if (TST->isTypeAlias())
1301       return getTypeInfo(TST->getAliasedType().getTypePtr());
1302     else
1303       return getTypeInfo(getCanonicalType(T));
1304   }
1305 
1306   case Type::Atomic: {
1307     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1308       = getTypeInfo(cast<AtomicType>(T)->getValueType());
1309     Width = Info.first;
1310     Align = Info.second;
1311     if (Width != 0 && Width <= Target->getMaxAtomicPromoteWidth() &&
1312         llvm::isPowerOf2_64(Width)) {
1313       // We can potentially perform lock-free atomic operations for this
1314       // type; promote the alignment appropriately.
1315       // FIXME: We could potentially promote the width here as well...
1316       // is that worthwhile?  (Non-struct atomic types generally have
1317       // power-of-two size anyway, but structs might not.  Requires a bit
1318       // of implementation work to make sure we zero out the extra bits.)
1319       Align = static_cast<unsigned>(Width);
1320     }
1321   }
1322 
1323   }
1324 
1325   assert(llvm::isPowerOf2_32(Align) && "Alignment must be power of 2");
1326   return std::make_pair(Width, Align);
1327 }
1328 
1329 /// toCharUnitsFromBits - Convert a size in bits to a size in characters.
1330 CharUnits ASTContext::toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const {
1331   return CharUnits::fromQuantity(BitSize / getCharWidth());
1332 }
1333 
1334 /// toBits - Convert a size in characters to a size in characters.
1335 int64_t ASTContext::toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const {
1336   return CharSize.getQuantity() * getCharWidth();
1337 }
1338 
1339 /// getTypeSizeInChars - Return the size of the specified type, in characters.
1340 /// This method does not work on incomplete types.
1341 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1342   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1343 }
1344 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(const Type *T) const {
1345   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1346 }
1347 
1348 /// getTypeAlignInChars - Return the ABI-specified alignment of a type, in
1349 /// characters. This method does not work on incomplete types.
1350 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const {
1351   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1352 }
1353 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(const Type *T) const {
1354   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1355 }
1356 
1357 /// getPreferredTypeAlign - Return the "preferred" alignment of the specified
1358 /// type for the current target in bits.  This can be different than the ABI
1359 /// alignment in cases where it is beneficial for performance to overalign
1360 /// a data type.
1361 unsigned ASTContext::getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type *T) const {
1362   unsigned ABIAlign = getTypeAlign(T);
1363 
1364   // Double and long long should be naturally aligned if possible.
1365   if (const ComplexType* CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
1366     T = CT->getElementType().getTypePtr();
1367   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Double) ||
1368       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::LongLong) ||
1369       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ULongLong))
1370     return std::max(ABIAlign, (unsigned)getTypeSize(T));
1371 
1372   return ABIAlign;
1373 }
1374 
1375 /// DeepCollectObjCIvars -
1376 /// This routine first collects all declared, but not synthesized, ivars in
1377 /// super class and then collects all ivars, including those synthesized for
1378 /// current class. This routine is used for implementation of current class
1379 /// when all ivars, declared and synthesized are known.
1380 ///
1381 void ASTContext::DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI,
1382                                       bool leafClass,
1383                             SmallVectorImpl<const ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const {
1384   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *SuperClass = OI->getSuperClass())
1385     DeepCollectObjCIvars(SuperClass, false, Ivars);
1386   if (!leafClass) {
1387     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::ivar_iterator I = OI->ivar_begin(),
1388          E = OI->ivar_end(); I != E; ++I)
1389       Ivars.push_back(*I);
1390   } else {
1391     ObjCInterfaceDecl *IDecl = const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl *>(OI);
1392     for (const ObjCIvarDecl *Iv = IDecl->all_declared_ivar_begin(); Iv;
1393          Iv= Iv->getNextIvar())
1394       Ivars.push_back(Iv);
1395   }
1396 }
1397 
1398 /// CollectInheritedProtocols - Collect all protocols in current class and
1399 /// those inherited by it.
1400 void ASTContext::CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl *CDecl,
1401                           llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> &Protocols) {
1402   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(CDecl)) {
1403     // We can use protocol_iterator here instead of
1404     // all_referenced_protocol_iterator since we are walking all categories.
1405     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::all_protocol_iterator P = OI->all_referenced_protocol_begin(),
1406          PE = OI->all_referenced_protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1407       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1408       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1409       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1410            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1411         Protocols.insert((*P)->getCanonicalDecl());
1412         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1413       }
1414     }
1415 
1416     // Categories of this Interface.
1417     for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDeclChain = OI->getCategoryList();
1418          CDeclChain; CDeclChain = CDeclChain->getNextClassCategory())
1419       CollectInheritedProtocols(CDeclChain, Protocols);
1420     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *SD = OI->getSuperClass())
1421       while (SD) {
1422         CollectInheritedProtocols(SD, Protocols);
1423         SD = SD->getSuperClass();
1424       }
1425   } else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *OC = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(CDecl)) {
1426     for (ObjCCategoryDecl::protocol_iterator P = OC->protocol_begin(),
1427          PE = OC->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1428       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1429       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1430       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1431            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1432         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1433     }
1434   } else if (const ObjCProtocolDecl *OP = dyn_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl>(CDecl)) {
1435     for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = OP->protocol_begin(),
1436          PE = OP->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1437       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1438       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1439       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1440            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1441         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1442     }
1443   }
1444 }
1445 
1446 unsigned ASTContext::CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI) const {
1447   unsigned count = 0;
1448   // Count ivars declared in class extension.
1449   for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDecl = OI->getFirstClassExtension(); CDecl;
1450        CDecl = CDecl->getNextClassExtension())
1451     count += CDecl->ivar_size();
1452 
1453   // Count ivar defined in this class's implementation.  This
1454   // includes synthesized ivars.
1455   if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplDecl = OI->getImplementation())
1456     count += ImplDecl->ivar_size();
1457 
1458   return count;
1459 }
1460 
1461 bool ASTContext::isSentinelNullExpr(const Expr *E) {
1462   if (!E)
1463     return false;
1464 
1465   // nullptr_t is always treated as null.
1466   if (E->getType()->isNullPtrType()) return true;
1467 
1468   if (E->getType()->isAnyPointerType() &&
1469       E->IgnoreParenCasts()->isNullPointerConstant(*this,
1470                                                 Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull))
1471     return true;
1472 
1473   // Unfortunately, __null has type 'int'.
1474   if (isa<GNUNullExpr>(E)) return true;
1475 
1476   return false;
1477 }
1478 
1479 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl,or NULL if none exists.
1480 ObjCImplementationDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) {
1481   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1482     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1483   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1484     return cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(I->second);
1485   return 0;
1486 }
1487 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl, or NULL if none exists.
1488 ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *D) {
1489   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1490     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1491   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1492     return cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(I->second);
1493   return 0;
1494 }
1495 
1496 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl.
1497 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFaceD,
1498                            ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplD) {
1499   assert(IFaceD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1500   ObjCImpls[IFaceD] = ImplD;
1501 }
1502 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl.
1503 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *CatD,
1504                            ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ImplD) {
1505   assert(CatD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1506   ObjCImpls[CatD] = ImplD;
1507 }
1508 
1509 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjContainingInterface(NamedDecl *ND) const {
1510   if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1511     return ID;
1512   if (ObjCCategoryDecl *CD = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1513     return CD->getClassInterface();
1514   if (ObjCImplDecl *IMD = dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1515     return IMD->getClassInterface();
1516 
1517   return 0;
1518 }
1519 
1520 /// \brief Get the copy initialization expression of VarDecl,or NULL if
1521 /// none exists.
1522 Expr *ASTContext::getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl*VD) {
1523   assert(VD && "Passed null params");
1524   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1525          "getBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1526   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl*, Expr*>::iterator
1527     I = BlockVarCopyInits.find(VD);
1528   return (I != BlockVarCopyInits.end()) ? cast<Expr>(I->second) : 0;
1529 }
1530 
1531 /// \brief Set the copy inialization expression of a block var decl.
1532 void ASTContext::setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl*VD, Expr* Init) {
1533   assert(VD && Init && "Passed null params");
1534   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1535          "setBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1536   BlockVarCopyInits[VD] = Init;
1537 }
1538 
1539 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1540                                                  unsigned DataSize) const {
1541   if (!DataSize)
1542     DataSize = TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T);
1543   else
1544     assert(DataSize == TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T) &&
1545            "incorrect data size provided to CreateTypeSourceInfo!");
1546 
1547   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo =
1548     (TypeSourceInfo*)BumpAlloc.Allocate(sizeof(TypeSourceInfo) + DataSize, 8);
1549   new (TInfo) TypeSourceInfo(T);
1550   return TInfo;
1551 }
1552 
1553 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1554                                                      SourceLocation L) const {
1555   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(T);
1556   DI->getTypeLoc().initialize(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), L);
1557   return DI;
1558 }
1559 
1560 const ASTRecordLayout &
1561 ASTContext::getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) const {
1562   return getObjCLayout(D, 0);
1563 }
1564 
1565 const ASTRecordLayout &
1566 ASTContext::getASTObjCImplementationLayout(
1567                                         const ObjCImplementationDecl *D) const {
1568   return getObjCLayout(D->getClassInterface(), D);
1569 }
1570 
1571 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1572 //                   Type creation/memoization methods
1573 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1574 
1575 QualType
1576 ASTContext::getExtQualType(const Type *baseType, Qualifiers quals) const {
1577   unsigned fastQuals = quals.getFastQualifiers();
1578   quals.removeFastQualifiers();
1579 
1580   // Check if we've already instantiated this type.
1581   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1582   ExtQuals::Profile(ID, baseType, quals);
1583   void *insertPos = 0;
1584   if (ExtQuals *eq = ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) {
1585     assert(eq->getQualifiers() == quals);
1586     return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1587   }
1588 
1589   // If the base type is not canonical, make the appropriate canonical type.
1590   QualType canon;
1591   if (!baseType->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
1592     SplitQualType canonSplit = baseType->getCanonicalTypeInternal().split();
1593     canonSplit.Quals.addConsistentQualifiers(quals);
1594     canon = getExtQualType(canonSplit.Ty, canonSplit.Quals);
1595 
1596     // Re-find the insert position.
1597     (void) ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
1598   }
1599 
1600   ExtQuals *eq = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ExtQuals(baseType, canon, quals);
1601   ExtQualNodes.InsertNode(eq, insertPos);
1602   return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1603 }
1604 
1605 QualType
1606 ASTContext::getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T, unsigned AddressSpace) const {
1607   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1608   if (CanT.getAddressSpace() == AddressSpace)
1609     return T;
1610 
1611   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1612   // into one ExtQuals node.
1613   QualifierCollector Quals;
1614   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1615 
1616   // If this type already has an address space specified, it cannot get
1617   // another one.
1618   assert(!Quals.hasAddressSpace() &&
1619          "Type cannot be in multiple addr spaces!");
1620   Quals.addAddressSpace(AddressSpace);
1621 
1622   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1623 }
1624 
1625 QualType ASTContext::getObjCGCQualType(QualType T,
1626                                        Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const {
1627   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1628   if (CanT.getObjCGCAttr() == GCAttr)
1629     return T;
1630 
1631   if (const PointerType *ptr = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
1632     QualType Pointee = ptr->getPointeeType();
1633     if (Pointee->isAnyPointerType()) {
1634       QualType ResultType = getObjCGCQualType(Pointee, GCAttr);
1635       return getPointerType(ResultType);
1636     }
1637   }
1638 
1639   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1640   // into one ExtQuals node.
1641   QualifierCollector Quals;
1642   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1643 
1644   // If this type already has an ObjCGC specified, it cannot get
1645   // another one.
1646   assert(!Quals.hasObjCGCAttr() &&
1647          "Type cannot have multiple ObjCGCs!");
1648   Quals.addObjCGCAttr(GCAttr);
1649 
1650   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1651 }
1652 
1653 const FunctionType *ASTContext::adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType *T,
1654                                                    FunctionType::ExtInfo Info) {
1655   if (T->getExtInfo() == Info)
1656     return T;
1657 
1658   QualType Result;
1659   if (const FunctionNoProtoType *FNPT = dyn_cast<FunctionNoProtoType>(T)) {
1660     Result = getFunctionNoProtoType(FNPT->getResultType(), Info);
1661   } else {
1662     const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(T);
1663     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
1664     EPI.ExtInfo = Info;
1665     Result = getFunctionType(FPT->getResultType(), FPT->arg_type_begin(),
1666                              FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
1667   }
1668 
1669   return cast<FunctionType>(Result.getTypePtr());
1670 }
1671 
1672 /// getComplexType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a complex
1673 /// number with the specified element type.
1674 QualType ASTContext::getComplexType(QualType T) const {
1675   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1676   // structure.
1677   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1678   ComplexType::Profile(ID, T);
1679 
1680   void *InsertPos = 0;
1681   if (ComplexType *CT = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1682     return QualType(CT, 0);
1683 
1684   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1685   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1686   QualType Canonical;
1687   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1688     Canonical = getComplexType(getCanonicalType(T));
1689 
1690     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1691     ComplexType *NewIP = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1692     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1693   }
1694   ComplexType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ComplexType(T, Canonical);
1695   Types.push_back(New);
1696   ComplexTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1697   return QualType(New, 0);
1698 }
1699 
1700 /// getPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a pointer to
1701 /// the specified type.
1702 QualType ASTContext::getPointerType(QualType T) const {
1703   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1704   // structure.
1705   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1706   PointerType::Profile(ID, T);
1707 
1708   void *InsertPos = 0;
1709   if (PointerType *PT = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1710     return QualType(PT, 0);
1711 
1712   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1713   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1714   QualType Canonical;
1715   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1716     Canonical = getPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
1717 
1718     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1719     PointerType *NewIP = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1720     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1721   }
1722   PointerType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) PointerType(T, Canonical);
1723   Types.push_back(New);
1724   PointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1725   return QualType(New, 0);
1726 }
1727 
1728 /// getBlockPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for
1729 /// a pointer to the specified block.
1730 QualType ASTContext::getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const {
1731   assert(T->isFunctionType() && "block of function types only");
1732   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one block of a particular
1733   // structure.
1734   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1735   BlockPointerType::Profile(ID, T);
1736 
1737   void *InsertPos = 0;
1738   if (BlockPointerType *PT =
1739         BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1740     return QualType(PT, 0);
1741 
1742   // If the block pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
1743   // type either so fill in the canonical type field.
1744   QualType Canonical;
1745   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1746     Canonical = getBlockPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
1747 
1748     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1749     BlockPointerType *NewIP =
1750       BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1751     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1752   }
1753   BlockPointerType *New
1754     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BlockPointerType(T, Canonical);
1755   Types.push_back(New);
1756   BlockPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1757   return QualType(New, 0);
1758 }
1759 
1760 /// getLValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
1761 /// lvalue reference to the specified type.
1762 QualType
1763 ASTContext::getLValueReferenceType(QualType T, bool SpelledAsLValue) const {
1764   assert(getCanonicalType(T) != OverloadTy &&
1765          "Unresolved overloaded function type");
1766 
1767   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1768   // structure.
1769   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1770   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, SpelledAsLValue);
1771 
1772   void *InsertPos = 0;
1773   if (LValueReferenceType *RT =
1774         LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1775     return QualType(RT, 0);
1776 
1777   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
1778 
1779   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
1780   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1781   QualType Canonical;
1782   if (!SpelledAsLValue || InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
1783     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
1784     Canonical = getLValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
1785 
1786     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1787     LValueReferenceType *NewIP =
1788       LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1789     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1790   }
1791 
1792   LValueReferenceType *New
1793     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) LValueReferenceType(T, Canonical,
1794                                                      SpelledAsLValue);
1795   Types.push_back(New);
1796   LValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1797 
1798   return QualType(New, 0);
1799 }
1800 
1801 /// getRValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
1802 /// rvalue reference to the specified type.
1803 QualType ASTContext::getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const {
1804   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1805   // structure.
1806   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1807   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, false);
1808 
1809   void *InsertPos = 0;
1810   if (RValueReferenceType *RT =
1811         RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1812     return QualType(RT, 0);
1813 
1814   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
1815 
1816   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
1817   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1818   QualType Canonical;
1819   if (InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
1820     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
1821     Canonical = getRValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
1822 
1823     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1824     RValueReferenceType *NewIP =
1825       RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1826     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1827   }
1828 
1829   RValueReferenceType *New
1830     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RValueReferenceType(T, Canonical);
1831   Types.push_back(New);
1832   RValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1833   return QualType(New, 0);
1834 }
1835 
1836 /// getMemberPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a
1837 /// member pointer to the specified type, in the specified class.
1838 QualType ASTContext::getMemberPointerType(QualType T, const Type *Cls) const {
1839   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1840   // structure.
1841   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1842   MemberPointerType::Profile(ID, T, Cls);
1843 
1844   void *InsertPos = 0;
1845   if (MemberPointerType *PT =
1846       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1847     return QualType(PT, 0);
1848 
1849   // If the pointee or class type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
1850   // type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1851   QualType Canonical;
1852   if (!T.isCanonical() || !Cls->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
1853     Canonical = getMemberPointerType(getCanonicalType(T),getCanonicalType(Cls));
1854 
1855     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1856     MemberPointerType *NewIP =
1857       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1858     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1859   }
1860   MemberPointerType *New
1861     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) MemberPointerType(T, Cls, Canonical);
1862   Types.push_back(New);
1863   MemberPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1864   return QualType(New, 0);
1865 }
1866 
1867 /// getConstantArrayType - Return the unique reference to the type for an
1868 /// array of the specified element type.
1869 QualType ASTContext::getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy,
1870                                           const llvm::APInt &ArySizeIn,
1871                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
1872                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const {
1873   assert((EltTy->isDependentType() ||
1874           EltTy->isIncompleteType() || EltTy->isConstantSizeType()) &&
1875          "Constant array of VLAs is illegal!");
1876 
1877   // Convert the array size into a canonical width matching the pointer size for
1878   // the target.
1879   llvm::APInt ArySize(ArySizeIn);
1880   ArySize =
1881     ArySize.zextOrTrunc(Target->getPointerWidth(getTargetAddressSpace(EltTy)));
1882 
1883   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1884   ConstantArrayType::Profile(ID, EltTy, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
1885 
1886   void *InsertPos = 0;
1887   if (ConstantArrayType *ATP =
1888       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1889     return QualType(ATP, 0);
1890 
1891   // If the element type isn't canonical or has qualifiers, this won't
1892   // be a canonical type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1893   QualType Canon;
1894   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
1895     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
1896     Canon = getConstantArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), ArySize,
1897                                  ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
1898     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
1899 
1900     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1901     ConstantArrayType *NewIP =
1902       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1903     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1904   }
1905 
1906   ConstantArrayType *New = new(*this,TypeAlignment)
1907     ConstantArrayType(EltTy, Canon, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
1908   ConstantArrayTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1909   Types.push_back(New);
1910   return QualType(New, 0);
1911 }
1912 
1913 /// getVariableArrayDecayedType - Turns the given type, which may be
1914 /// variably-modified, into the corresponding type with all the known
1915 /// sizes replaced with [*].
1916 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const {
1917   // Vastly most common case.
1918   if (!type->isVariablyModifiedType()) return type;
1919 
1920   QualType result;
1921 
1922   SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
1923   const Type *ty = split.Ty;
1924   switch (ty->getTypeClass()) {
1925 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
1926 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
1927 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
1928 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
1929     llvm_unreachable("didn't desugar past all non-canonical types?");
1930 
1931   // These types should never be variably-modified.
1932   case Type::Builtin:
1933   case Type::Complex:
1934   case Type::Vector:
1935   case Type::ExtVector:
1936   case Type::DependentSizedExtVector:
1937   case Type::ObjCObject:
1938   case Type::ObjCInterface:
1939   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
1940   case Type::Record:
1941   case Type::Enum:
1942   case Type::UnresolvedUsing:
1943   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
1944   case Type::TypeOf:
1945   case Type::Decltype:
1946   case Type::UnaryTransform:
1947   case Type::DependentName:
1948   case Type::InjectedClassName:
1949   case Type::TemplateSpecialization:
1950   case Type::DependentTemplateSpecialization:
1951   case Type::TemplateTypeParm:
1952   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParmPack:
1953   case Type::Auto:
1954   case Type::PackExpansion:
1955     llvm_unreachable("type should never be variably-modified");
1956 
1957   // These types can be variably-modified but should never need to
1958   // further decay.
1959   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
1960   case Type::FunctionProto:
1961   case Type::BlockPointer:
1962   case Type::MemberPointer:
1963     return type;
1964 
1965   // These types can be variably-modified.  All these modifications
1966   // preserve structure except as noted by comments.
1967   // TODO: if we ever care about optimizing VLAs, there are no-op
1968   // optimizations available here.
1969   case Type::Pointer:
1970     result = getPointerType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(
1971                               cast<PointerType>(ty)->getPointeeType()));
1972     break;
1973 
1974   case Type::LValueReference: {
1975     const LValueReferenceType *lv = cast<LValueReferenceType>(ty);
1976     result = getLValueReferenceType(
1977                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()),
1978                                     lv->isSpelledAsLValue());
1979     break;
1980   }
1981 
1982   case Type::RValueReference: {
1983     const RValueReferenceType *lv = cast<RValueReferenceType>(ty);
1984     result = getRValueReferenceType(
1985                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()));
1986     break;
1987   }
1988 
1989   case Type::Atomic: {
1990     const AtomicType *at = cast<AtomicType>(ty);
1991     result = getAtomicType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(at->getValueType()));
1992     break;
1993   }
1994 
1995   case Type::ConstantArray: {
1996     const ConstantArrayType *cat = cast<ConstantArrayType>(ty);
1997     result = getConstantArrayType(
1998                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(cat->getElementType()),
1999                                   cat->getSize(),
2000                                   cat->getSizeModifier(),
2001                                   cat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers());
2002     break;
2003   }
2004 
2005   case Type::DependentSizedArray: {
2006     const DependentSizedArrayType *dat = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ty);
2007     result = getDependentSizedArrayType(
2008                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(dat->getElementType()),
2009                                         dat->getSizeExpr(),
2010                                         dat->getSizeModifier(),
2011                                         dat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2012                                         dat->getBracketsRange());
2013     break;
2014   }
2015 
2016   // Turn incomplete types into [*] types.
2017   case Type::IncompleteArray: {
2018     const IncompleteArrayType *iat = cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ty);
2019     result = getVariableArrayType(
2020                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(iat->getElementType()),
2021                                   /*size*/ 0,
2022                                   ArrayType::Normal,
2023                                   iat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2024                                   SourceRange());
2025     break;
2026   }
2027 
2028   // Turn VLA types into [*] types.
2029   case Type::VariableArray: {
2030     const VariableArrayType *vat = cast<VariableArrayType>(ty);
2031     result = getVariableArrayType(
2032                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(vat->getElementType()),
2033                                   /*size*/ 0,
2034                                   ArrayType::Star,
2035                                   vat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2036                                   vat->getBracketsRange());
2037     break;
2038   }
2039   }
2040 
2041   // Apply the top-level qualifiers from the original.
2042   return getQualifiedType(result, split.Quals);
2043 }
2044 
2045 /// getVariableArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to the type for a
2046 /// variable array of the specified element type.
2047 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2048                                           Expr *NumElts,
2049                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2050                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals,
2051                                           SourceRange Brackets) const {
2052   // Since we don't unique expressions, it isn't possible to unique VLA's
2053   // that have an expression provided for their size.
2054   QualType Canon;
2055 
2056   // Be sure to pull qualifiers off the element type.
2057   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2058     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2059     Canon = getVariableArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), NumElts, ASM,
2060                                  IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2061     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2062   }
2063 
2064   VariableArrayType *New = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2065     VariableArrayType(EltTy, Canon, NumElts, ASM, IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2066 
2067   VariableArrayTypes.push_back(New);
2068   Types.push_back(New);
2069   return QualType(New, 0);
2070 }
2071 
2072 /// getDependentSizedArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to
2073 /// the type for a dependently-sized array of the specified element
2074 /// type.
2075 QualType ASTContext::getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType,
2076                                                 Expr *numElements,
2077                                                 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2078                                                 unsigned elementTypeQuals,
2079                                                 SourceRange brackets) const {
2080   assert((!numElements || numElements->isTypeDependent() ||
2081           numElements->isValueDependent()) &&
2082          "Size must be type- or value-dependent!");
2083 
2084   // Dependently-sized array types that do not have a specified number
2085   // of elements will have their sizes deduced from a dependent
2086   // initializer.  We do no canonicalization here at all, which is okay
2087   // because they can't be used in most locations.
2088   if (!numElements) {
2089     DependentSizedArrayType *newType
2090       = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2091           DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, QualType(),
2092                                   numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2093                                   brackets);
2094     Types.push_back(newType);
2095     return QualType(newType, 0);
2096   }
2097 
2098   // Otherwise, we actually build a new type every time, but we
2099   // also build a canonical type.
2100 
2101   SplitQualType canonElementType = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2102 
2103   void *insertPos = 0;
2104   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2105   DependentSizedArrayType::Profile(ID, *this,
2106                                    QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2107                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals, numElements);
2108 
2109   // Look for an existing type with these properties.
2110   DependentSizedArrayType *canonTy =
2111     DependentSizedArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2112 
2113   // If we don't have one, build one.
2114   if (!canonTy) {
2115     canonTy = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2116       DependentSizedArrayType(*this, QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2117                               QualType(), numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2118                               brackets);
2119     DependentSizedArrayTypes.InsertNode(canonTy, insertPos);
2120     Types.push_back(canonTy);
2121   }
2122 
2123   // Apply qualifiers from the element type to the array.
2124   QualType canon = getQualifiedType(QualType(canonTy,0),
2125                                     canonElementType.Quals);
2126 
2127   // If we didn't need extra canonicalization for the element type,
2128   // then just use that as our result.
2129   if (QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0) == elementType)
2130     return canon;
2131 
2132   // Otherwise, we need to build a type which follows the spelling
2133   // of the element type.
2134   DependentSizedArrayType *sugaredType
2135     = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2136         DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, canon, numElements,
2137                                 ASM, elementTypeQuals, brackets);
2138   Types.push_back(sugaredType);
2139   return QualType(sugaredType, 0);
2140 }
2141 
2142 QualType ASTContext::getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType,
2143                                             ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2144                                             unsigned elementTypeQuals) const {
2145   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2146   IncompleteArrayType::Profile(ID, elementType, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2147 
2148   void *insertPos = 0;
2149   if (IncompleteArrayType *iat =
2150        IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos))
2151     return QualType(iat, 0);
2152 
2153   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2154   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.  We also have to pull
2155   // qualifiers off the element type.
2156   QualType canon;
2157 
2158   if (!elementType.isCanonical() || elementType.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2159     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2160     canon = getIncompleteArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0),
2161                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2162     canon = getQualifiedType(canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2163 
2164     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2165     IncompleteArrayType *existing =
2166       IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2167     assert(!existing && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void) existing;
2168   }
2169 
2170   IncompleteArrayType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2171     IncompleteArrayType(elementType, canon, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2172 
2173   IncompleteArrayTypes.InsertNode(newType, insertPos);
2174   Types.push_back(newType);
2175   return QualType(newType, 0);
2176 }
2177 
2178 /// getVectorType - Return the unique reference to a vector type of
2179 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2180 QualType ASTContext::getVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts,
2181                                    VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const {
2182   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType());
2183 
2184   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2185   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2186   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::Vector, VecKind);
2187 
2188   void *InsertPos = 0;
2189   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2190     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2191 
2192   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2193   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2194   QualType Canonical;
2195   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2196     Canonical = getVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts, VecKind);
2197 
2198     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2199     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2200     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2201   }
2202   VectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2203     VectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical, VecKind);
2204   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2205   Types.push_back(New);
2206   return QualType(New, 0);
2207 }
2208 
2209 /// getExtVectorType - Return the unique reference to an extended vector type of
2210 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2211 QualType
2212 ASTContext::getExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts) const {
2213   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType() || vecType->isDependentType());
2214 
2215   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2216   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2217   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::ExtVector,
2218                       VectorType::GenericVector);
2219   void *InsertPos = 0;
2220   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2221     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2222 
2223   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2224   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2225   QualType Canonical;
2226   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2227     Canonical = getExtVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts);
2228 
2229     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2230     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2231     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2232   }
2233   ExtVectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2234     ExtVectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical);
2235   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2236   Types.push_back(New);
2237   return QualType(New, 0);
2238 }
2239 
2240 QualType
2241 ASTContext::getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType,
2242                                            Expr *SizeExpr,
2243                                            SourceLocation AttrLoc) const {
2244   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2245   DependentSizedExtVectorType::Profile(ID, *this, getCanonicalType(vecType),
2246                                        SizeExpr);
2247 
2248   void *InsertPos = 0;
2249   DependentSizedExtVectorType *Canon
2250     = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2251   DependentSizedExtVectorType *New;
2252   if (Canon) {
2253     // We already have a canonical version of this array type; use it as
2254     // the canonical type for a newly-built type.
2255     New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2256       DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(Canon, 0),
2257                                   SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2258   } else {
2259     QualType CanonVecTy = getCanonicalType(vecType);
2260     if (CanonVecTy == vecType) {
2261       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2262         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(), SizeExpr,
2263                                     AttrLoc);
2264 
2265       DependentSizedExtVectorType *CanonCheck
2266         = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2267       assert(!CanonCheck && "Dependent-sized ext_vector canonical type broken");
2268       (void)CanonCheck;
2269       DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2270     } else {
2271       QualType Canon = getDependentSizedExtVectorType(CanonVecTy, SizeExpr,
2272                                                       SourceLocation());
2273       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2274         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, Canon, SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2275     }
2276   }
2277 
2278   Types.push_back(New);
2279   return QualType(New, 0);
2280 }
2281 
2282 /// getFunctionNoProtoType - Return a K&R style C function type like 'int()'.
2283 ///
2284 QualType
2285 ASTContext::getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy,
2286                                    const FunctionType::ExtInfo &Info) const {
2287   const CallingConv DefaultCC = Info.getCC();
2288   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2289                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2290   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2291   // structure.
2292   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2293   FunctionNoProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, Info);
2294 
2295   void *InsertPos = 0;
2296   if (FunctionNoProtoType *FT =
2297         FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2298     return QualType(FT, 0);
2299 
2300   QualType Canonical;
2301   if (!ResultTy.isCanonical() ||
2302       getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2303     Canonical =
2304       getFunctionNoProtoType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2305                      Info.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv)));
2306 
2307     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2308     FunctionNoProtoType *NewIP =
2309       FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2310     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2311   }
2312 
2313   FunctionProtoType::ExtInfo newInfo = Info.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2314   FunctionNoProtoType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2315     FunctionNoProtoType(ResultTy, Canonical, newInfo);
2316   Types.push_back(New);
2317   FunctionNoProtoTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2318   return QualType(New, 0);
2319 }
2320 
2321 /// getFunctionType - Return a normal function type with a typed argument
2322 /// list.  isVariadic indicates whether the argument list includes '...'.
2323 QualType
2324 ASTContext::getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy,
2325                             const QualType *ArgArray, unsigned NumArgs,
2326                             const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo &EPI) const {
2327   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2328   // structure.
2329   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2330   FunctionProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, EPI, *this);
2331 
2332   void *InsertPos = 0;
2333   if (FunctionProtoType *FTP =
2334         FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2335     return QualType(FTP, 0);
2336 
2337   // Determine whether the type being created is already canonical or not.
2338   bool isCanonical =
2339     EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_None && ResultTy.isCanonical() &&
2340     !EPI.HasTrailingReturn;
2341   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs && isCanonical; ++i)
2342     if (!ArgArray[i].isCanonicalAsParam())
2343       isCanonical = false;
2344 
2345   const CallingConv DefaultCC = EPI.ExtInfo.getCC();
2346   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2347                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2348 
2349   // If this type isn't canonical, get the canonical version of it.
2350   // The exception spec is not part of the canonical type.
2351   QualType Canonical;
2352   if (!isCanonical || getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2353     SmallVector<QualType, 16> CanonicalArgs;
2354     CanonicalArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2355     for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2356       CanonicalArgs.push_back(getCanonicalParamType(ArgArray[i]));
2357 
2358     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo CanonicalEPI = EPI;
2359     CanonicalEPI.HasTrailingReturn = false;
2360     CanonicalEPI.ExceptionSpecType = EST_None;
2361     CanonicalEPI.NumExceptions = 0;
2362     CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo
2363       = CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv));
2364 
2365     Canonical = getFunctionType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2366                                 CanonicalArgs.data(), NumArgs,
2367                                 CanonicalEPI);
2368 
2369     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2370     FunctionProtoType *NewIP =
2371       FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2372     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2373   }
2374 
2375   // FunctionProtoType objects are allocated with extra bytes after
2376   // them for three variable size arrays at the end:
2377   //  - parameter types
2378   //  - exception types
2379   //  - consumed-arguments flags
2380   // Instead of the exception types, there could be a noexcept
2381   // expression, or information used to resolve the exception
2382   // specification.
2383   size_t Size = sizeof(FunctionProtoType) +
2384                 NumArgs * sizeof(QualType);
2385   if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Dynamic) {
2386     Size += EPI.NumExceptions * sizeof(QualType);
2387   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_ComputedNoexcept) {
2388     Size += sizeof(Expr*);
2389   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Uninstantiated) {
2390     Size += 2 * sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2391   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Unevaluated) {
2392     Size += sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2393   }
2394   if (EPI.ConsumedArguments)
2395     Size += NumArgs * sizeof(bool);
2396 
2397   FunctionProtoType *FTP = (FunctionProtoType*) Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
2398   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo newEPI = EPI;
2399   newEPI.ExtInfo = EPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2400   new (FTP) FunctionProtoType(ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, Canonical, newEPI);
2401   Types.push_back(FTP);
2402   FunctionProtoTypes.InsertNode(FTP, InsertPos);
2403   return QualType(FTP, 0);
2404 }
2405 
2406 #ifndef NDEBUG
2407 static bool NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl *D) {
2408   if (!isa<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) return false;
2409   const CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D);
2410   if (isa<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2411     return true;
2412   if (RD->getDescribedClassTemplate() &&
2413       !isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2414     return true;
2415   return false;
2416 }
2417 #endif
2418 
2419 /// getInjectedClassNameType - Return the unique reference to the
2420 /// injected class name type for the specified templated declaration.
2421 QualType ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *Decl,
2422                                               QualType TST) const {
2423   assert(NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Decl));
2424   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) {
2425     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2426   } else if (CXXRecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) {
2427     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous declaration has no type");
2428     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
2429     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2430   } else {
2431     Type *newType =
2432       new (*this, TypeAlignment) InjectedClassNameType(Decl, TST);
2433     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2434     Types.push_back(newType);
2435   }
2436   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2437 }
2438 
2439 /// getTypeDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2440 /// specified type declaration.
2441 QualType ASTContext::getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl *Decl) const {
2442   assert(Decl && "Passed null for Decl param");
2443   assert(!Decl->TypeForDecl && "TypeForDecl present in slow case");
2444 
2445   if (const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = dyn_cast<TypedefNameDecl>(Decl))
2446     return getTypedefType(Typedef);
2447 
2448   assert(!isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(Decl) &&
2449          "Template type parameter types are always available.");
2450 
2451   if (const RecordDecl *Record = dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(Decl)) {
2452     assert(!Record->getPreviousDecl() &&
2453            "struct/union has previous declaration");
2454     assert(!NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Record));
2455     return getRecordType(Record);
2456   } else if (const EnumDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(Decl)) {
2457     assert(!Enum->getPreviousDecl() &&
2458            "enum has previous declaration");
2459     return getEnumType(Enum);
2460   } else if (const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Using =
2461                dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Decl)) {
2462     Type *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnresolvedUsingType(Using);
2463     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2464     Types.push_back(newType);
2465   } else
2466     llvm_unreachable("TypeDecl without a type?");
2467 
2468   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2469 }
2470 
2471 /// getTypedefType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2472 /// specified typedef name decl.
2473 QualType
2474 ASTContext::getTypedefType(const TypedefNameDecl *Decl,
2475                            QualType Canonical) const {
2476   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2477 
2478   if (Canonical.isNull())
2479     Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decl->getUnderlyingType());
2480   TypedefType *newType = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2481     TypedefType(Type::Typedef, Decl, Canonical);
2482   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2483   Types.push_back(newType);
2484   return QualType(newType, 0);
2485 }
2486 
2487 QualType ASTContext::getRecordType(const RecordDecl *Decl) const {
2488   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2489 
2490   if (const RecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2491     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2492       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2493 
2494   RecordType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RecordType(Decl);
2495   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2496   Types.push_back(newType);
2497   return QualType(newType, 0);
2498 }
2499 
2500 QualType ASTContext::getEnumType(const EnumDecl *Decl) const {
2501   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2502 
2503   if (const EnumDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2504     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2505       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2506 
2507   EnumType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) EnumType(Decl);
2508   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2509   Types.push_back(newType);
2510   return QualType(newType, 0);
2511 }
2512 
2513 QualType ASTContext::getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind,
2514                                        QualType modifiedType,
2515                                        QualType equivalentType) {
2516   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id;
2517   AttributedType::Profile(id, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2518 
2519   void *insertPos = 0;
2520   AttributedType *type = AttributedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos);
2521   if (type) return QualType(type, 0);
2522 
2523   QualType canon = getCanonicalType(equivalentType);
2524   type = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2525            AttributedType(canon, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2526 
2527   Types.push_back(type);
2528   AttributedTypes.InsertNode(type, insertPos);
2529 
2530   return QualType(type, 0);
2531 }
2532 
2533 
2534 /// \brief Retrieve a substitution-result type.
2535 QualType
2536 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2537                                          QualType Replacement) const {
2538   assert(Replacement.isCanonical()
2539          && "replacement types must always be canonical");
2540 
2541   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2542   SubstTemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Parm, Replacement);
2543   void *InsertPos = 0;
2544   SubstTemplateTypeParmType *SubstParm
2545     = SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2546 
2547   if (!SubstParm) {
2548     SubstParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2549       SubstTemplateTypeParmType(Parm, Replacement);
2550     Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2551     SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2552   }
2553 
2554   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2555 }
2556 
2557 /// \brief Retrieve a
2558 QualType ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(
2559                                           const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2560                                               const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) {
2561 #ifndef NDEBUG
2562   for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator P = ArgPack.pack_begin(),
2563                                     PEnd = ArgPack.pack_end();
2564        P != PEnd; ++P) {
2565     assert(P->getKind() == TemplateArgument::Type &&"Pack contains a non-type");
2566     assert(P->getAsType().isCanonical() && "Pack contains non-canonical type");
2567   }
2568 #endif
2569 
2570   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2571   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType::Profile(ID, Parm, ArgPack);
2572   void *InsertPos = 0;
2573   if (SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2574         = SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2575     return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2576 
2577   QualType Canon;
2578   if (!Parm->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2579     Canon = getCanonicalType(QualType(Parm, 0));
2580     Canon = getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(cast<TemplateTypeParmType>(Canon),
2581                                              ArgPack);
2582     SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2583   }
2584 
2585   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2586     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(Parm, Canon,
2587                                                                ArgPack);
2588   Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2589   SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2590   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2591 }
2592 
2593 /// \brief Retrieve the template type parameter type for a template
2594 /// parameter or parameter pack with the given depth, index, and (optionally)
2595 /// name.
2596 QualType ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth, unsigned Index,
2597                                              bool ParameterPack,
2598                                              TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl) const {
2599   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2600   TemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Depth, Index, ParameterPack, TTPDecl);
2601   void *InsertPos = 0;
2602   TemplateTypeParmType *TypeParm
2603     = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2604 
2605   if (TypeParm)
2606     return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2607 
2608   if (TTPDecl) {
2609     QualType Canon = getTemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2610     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TemplateTypeParmType(TTPDecl, Canon);
2611 
2612     TemplateTypeParmType *TypeCheck
2613       = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2614     assert(!TypeCheck && "Template type parameter canonical type broken");
2615     (void)TypeCheck;
2616   } else
2617     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2618       TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2619 
2620   Types.push_back(TypeParm);
2621   TemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(TypeParm, InsertPos);
2622 
2623   return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2624 }
2625 
2626 TypeSourceInfo *
2627 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name,
2628                                               SourceLocation NameLoc,
2629                                         const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2630                                               QualType Underlying) const {
2631   assert(!Name.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2632          "No dependent template names here!");
2633   QualType TST = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name, Args, Underlying);
2634 
2635   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(TST);
2636   TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc TL
2637     = cast<TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc>(DI->getTypeLoc());
2638   TL.setTemplateKeywordLoc(SourceLocation());
2639   TL.setTemplateNameLoc(NameLoc);
2640   TL.setLAngleLoc(Args.getLAngleLoc());
2641   TL.setRAngleLoc(Args.getRAngleLoc());
2642   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TL.getNumArgs(); i != e; ++i)
2643     TL.setArgLocInfo(i, Args[i].getLocInfo());
2644   return DI;
2645 }
2646 
2647 QualType
2648 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2649                                           const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2650                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2651   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2652          "No dependent template names here!");
2653 
2654   unsigned NumArgs = Args.size();
2655 
2656   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> ArgVec;
2657   ArgVec.reserve(NumArgs);
2658   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2659     ArgVec.push_back(Args[i].getArgument());
2660 
2661   return getTemplateSpecializationType(Template, ArgVec.data(), NumArgs,
2662                                        Underlying);
2663 }
2664 
2665 #ifndef NDEBUG
2666 static bool hasAnyPackExpansions(const TemplateArgument *Args,
2667                                  unsigned NumArgs) {
2668   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
2669     if (Args[I].isPackExpansion())
2670       return true;
2671 
2672   return true;
2673 }
2674 #endif
2675 
2676 QualType
2677 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2678                                           const TemplateArgument *Args,
2679                                           unsigned NumArgs,
2680                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2681   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2682          "No dependent template names here!");
2683   // Look through qualified template names.
2684   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2685     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2686 
2687   bool IsTypeAlias =
2688     Template.getAsTemplateDecl() &&
2689     isa<TypeAliasTemplateDecl>(Template.getAsTemplateDecl());
2690   QualType CanonType;
2691   if (!Underlying.isNull())
2692     CanonType = getCanonicalType(Underlying);
2693   else {
2694     // We can get here with an alias template when the specialization contains
2695     // a pack expansion that does not match up with a parameter pack.
2696     assert((!IsTypeAlias || hasAnyPackExpansions(Args, NumArgs)) &&
2697            "Caller must compute aliased type");
2698     IsTypeAlias = false;
2699     CanonType = getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args,
2700                                                        NumArgs);
2701   }
2702 
2703   // Allocate the (non-canonical) template specialization type, but don't
2704   // try to unique it: these types typically have location information that
2705   // we don't unique and don't want to lose.
2706   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
2707                        sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs +
2708                        (IsTypeAlias? sizeof(QualType) : 0),
2709                        TypeAlignment);
2710   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
2711     = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, NumArgs, CanonType,
2712                                          IsTypeAlias ? Underlying : QualType());
2713 
2714   Types.push_back(Spec);
2715   return QualType(Spec, 0);
2716 }
2717 
2718 QualType
2719 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2720                                                    const TemplateArgument *Args,
2721                                                    unsigned NumArgs) const {
2722   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2723          "No dependent template names here!");
2724 
2725   // Look through qualified template names.
2726   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2727     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2728 
2729   // Build the canonical template specialization type.
2730   TemplateName CanonTemplate = getCanonicalTemplateName(Template);
2731   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> CanonArgs;
2732   CanonArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2733   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
2734     CanonArgs.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]));
2735 
2736   // Determine whether this canonical template specialization type already
2737   // exists.
2738   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2739   TemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, CanonTemplate,
2740                                       CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, *this);
2741 
2742   void *InsertPos = 0;
2743   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
2744     = TemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2745 
2746   if (!Spec) {
2747     // Allocate a new canonical template specialization type.
2748     void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
2749                           sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
2750                          TypeAlignment);
2751     Spec = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(CanonTemplate,
2752                                                 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs,
2753                                                 QualType(), QualType());
2754     Types.push_back(Spec);
2755     TemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(Spec, InsertPos);
2756   }
2757 
2758   assert(Spec->isDependentType() &&
2759          "Non-dependent template-id type must have a canonical type");
2760   return QualType(Spec, 0);
2761 }
2762 
2763 QualType
2764 ASTContext::getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2765                               NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2766                               QualType NamedType) const {
2767   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2768   ElaboratedType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, NamedType);
2769 
2770   void *InsertPos = 0;
2771   ElaboratedType *T = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2772   if (T)
2773     return QualType(T, 0);
2774 
2775   QualType Canon = NamedType;
2776   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
2777     Canon = getCanonicalType(NamedType);
2778     ElaboratedType *CheckT = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2779     assert(!CheckT && "Elaborated canonical type broken");
2780     (void)CheckT;
2781   }
2782 
2783   T = new (*this) ElaboratedType(Keyword, NNS, NamedType, Canon);
2784   Types.push_back(T);
2785   ElaboratedTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2786   return QualType(T, 0);
2787 }
2788 
2789 QualType
2790 ASTContext::getParenType(QualType InnerType) const {
2791   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2792   ParenType::Profile(ID, InnerType);
2793 
2794   void *InsertPos = 0;
2795   ParenType *T = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2796   if (T)
2797     return QualType(T, 0);
2798 
2799   QualType Canon = InnerType;
2800   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
2801     Canon = getCanonicalType(InnerType);
2802     ParenType *CheckT = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2803     assert(!CheckT && "Paren canonical type broken");
2804     (void)CheckT;
2805   }
2806 
2807   T = new (*this) ParenType(InnerType, Canon);
2808   Types.push_back(T);
2809   ParenTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2810   return QualType(T, 0);
2811 }
2812 
2813 QualType ASTContext::getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2814                                           NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2815                                           const IdentifierInfo *Name,
2816                                           QualType Canon) const {
2817   assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
2818 
2819   if (Canon.isNull()) {
2820     NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
2821     ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
2822     if (Keyword == ETK_None)
2823       CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
2824 
2825     if (CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword)
2826       Canon = getDependentNameType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, Name);
2827   }
2828 
2829   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2830   DependentNameType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, Name);
2831 
2832   void *InsertPos = 0;
2833   DependentNameType *T
2834     = DependentNameTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2835   if (T)
2836     return QualType(T, 0);
2837 
2838   T = new (*this) DependentNameType(Keyword, NNS, Name, Canon);
2839   Types.push_back(T);
2840   DependentNameTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2841   return QualType(T, 0);
2842 }
2843 
2844 QualType
2845 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
2846                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2847                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2848                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
2849                                  const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args) const {
2850   // TODO: avoid this copy
2851   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> ArgCopy;
2852   for (unsigned I = 0, E = Args.size(); I != E; ++I)
2853     ArgCopy.push_back(Args[I].getArgument());
2854   return getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, Name,
2855                                                 ArgCopy.size(),
2856                                                 ArgCopy.data());
2857 }
2858 
2859 QualType
2860 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
2861                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2862                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2863                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
2864                                  unsigned NumArgs,
2865                                  const TemplateArgument *Args) const {
2866   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
2867          "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
2868 
2869   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2870   DependentTemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, *this, Keyword, NNS,
2871                                                Name, NumArgs, Args);
2872 
2873   void *InsertPos = 0;
2874   DependentTemplateSpecializationType *T
2875     = DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2876   if (T)
2877     return QualType(T, 0);
2878 
2879   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
2880 
2881   ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
2882   if (Keyword == ETK_None) CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
2883 
2884   bool AnyNonCanonArgs = false;
2885   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> CanonArgs(NumArgs);
2886   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) {
2887     CanonArgs[I] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]);
2888     if (!CanonArgs[I].structurallyEquals(Args[I]))
2889       AnyNonCanonArgs = true;
2890   }
2891 
2892   QualType Canon;
2893   if (AnyNonCanonArgs || CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) {
2894     Canon = getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS,
2895                                                    Name, NumArgs,
2896                                                    CanonArgs.data());
2897 
2898     // Find the insert position again.
2899     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2900   }
2901 
2902   void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(DependentTemplateSpecializationType) +
2903                         sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
2904                        TypeAlignment);
2905   T = new (Mem) DependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS,
2906                                                     Name, NumArgs, Args, Canon);
2907   Types.push_back(T);
2908   DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2909   return QualType(T, 0);
2910 }
2911 
2912 QualType ASTContext::getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern,
2913                                       llvm::Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) {
2914   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2915   PackExpansionType::Profile(ID, Pattern, NumExpansions);
2916 
2917   assert(Pattern->containsUnexpandedParameterPack() &&
2918          "Pack expansions must expand one or more parameter packs");
2919   void *InsertPos = 0;
2920   PackExpansionType *T
2921     = PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2922   if (T)
2923     return QualType(T, 0);
2924 
2925   QualType Canon;
2926   if (!Pattern.isCanonical()) {
2927     Canon = getCanonicalType(Pattern);
2928     // The canonical type might not contain an unexpanded parameter pack, if it
2929     // contains an alias template specialization which ignores one of its
2930     // parameters.
2931     if (Canon->containsUnexpandedParameterPack()) {
2932       Canon = getPackExpansionType(getCanonicalType(Pattern), NumExpansions);
2933 
2934       // Find the insert position again, in case we inserted an element into
2935       // PackExpansionTypes and invalidated our insert position.
2936       PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2937     }
2938   }
2939 
2940   T = new (*this) PackExpansionType(Pattern, Canon, NumExpansions);
2941   Types.push_back(T);
2942   PackExpansionTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2943   return QualType(T, 0);
2944 }
2945 
2946 /// CmpProtocolNames - Comparison predicate for sorting protocols
2947 /// alphabetically.
2948 static bool CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl *LHS,
2949                             const ObjCProtocolDecl *RHS) {
2950   return LHS->getDeclName() < RHS->getDeclName();
2951 }
2952 
2953 static bool areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
2954                                 unsigned NumProtocols) {
2955   if (NumProtocols == 0) return true;
2956 
2957   if (Protocols[0]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[0])
2958     return false;
2959 
2960   for (unsigned i = 1; i != NumProtocols; ++i)
2961     if (!CmpProtocolNames(Protocols[i-1], Protocols[i]) ||
2962         Protocols[i]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[i])
2963       return false;
2964   return true;
2965 }
2966 
2967 static void SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl **Protocols,
2968                                    unsigned &NumProtocols) {
2969   ObjCProtocolDecl **ProtocolsEnd = Protocols+NumProtocols;
2970 
2971   // Sort protocols, keyed by name.
2972   std::sort(Protocols, Protocols+NumProtocols, CmpProtocolNames);
2973 
2974   // Canonicalize.
2975   for (unsigned I = 0, N = NumProtocols; I != N; ++I)
2976     Protocols[I] = Protocols[I]->getCanonicalDecl();
2977 
2978   // Remove duplicates.
2979   ProtocolsEnd = std::unique(Protocols, ProtocolsEnd);
2980   NumProtocols = ProtocolsEnd-Protocols;
2981 }
2982 
2983 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType,
2984                                        ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
2985                                        unsigned NumProtocols) const {
2986   // If the base type is an interface and there aren't any protocols
2987   // to add, then the interface type will do just fine.
2988   if (!NumProtocols && isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(BaseType))
2989     return BaseType;
2990 
2991   // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
2992   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2993   ObjCObjectTypeImpl::Profile(ID, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
2994   void *InsertPos = 0;
2995   if (ObjCObjectType *QT = ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2996     return QualType(QT, 0);
2997 
2998   // Build the canonical type, which has the canonical base type and
2999   // a sorted-and-uniqued list of protocols.
3000   QualType Canonical;
3001   bool ProtocolsSorted = areSortedAndUniqued(Protocols, NumProtocols);
3002   if (!ProtocolsSorted || !BaseType.isCanonical()) {
3003     if (!ProtocolsSorted) {
3004       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> Sorted(Protocols,
3005                                                      Protocols + NumProtocols);
3006       unsigned UniqueCount = NumProtocols;
3007 
3008       SortAndUniqueProtocols(&Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3009       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3010                                     &Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3011     } else {
3012       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3013                                     Protocols, NumProtocols);
3014     }
3015 
3016     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3017     ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3018   }
3019 
3020   unsigned Size = sizeof(ObjCObjectTypeImpl);
3021   Size += NumProtocols * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl *);
3022   void *Mem = Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
3023   ObjCObjectTypeImpl *T =
3024     new (Mem) ObjCObjectTypeImpl(Canonical, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3025 
3026   Types.push_back(T);
3027   ObjCObjectTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3028   return QualType(T, 0);
3029 }
3030 
3031 /// getObjCObjectPointerType - Return a ObjCObjectPointerType type for
3032 /// the given object type.
3033 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const {
3034   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3035   ObjCObjectPointerType::Profile(ID, ObjectT);
3036 
3037   void *InsertPos = 0;
3038   if (ObjCObjectPointerType *QT =
3039               ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3040     return QualType(QT, 0);
3041 
3042   // Find the canonical object type.
3043   QualType Canonical;
3044   if (!ObjectT.isCanonical()) {
3045     Canonical = getObjCObjectPointerType(getCanonicalType(ObjectT));
3046 
3047     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3048     ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3049   }
3050 
3051   // No match.
3052   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCObjectPointerType), TypeAlignment);
3053   ObjCObjectPointerType *QType =
3054     new (Mem) ObjCObjectPointerType(Canonical, ObjectT);
3055 
3056   Types.push_back(QType);
3057   ObjCObjectPointerTypes.InsertNode(QType, InsertPos);
3058   return QualType(QType, 0);
3059 }
3060 
3061 /// getObjCInterfaceType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3062 /// specified ObjC interface decl. The list of protocols is optional.
3063 QualType ASTContext::getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl,
3064                                           ObjCInterfaceDecl *PrevDecl) const {
3065   if (Decl->TypeForDecl)
3066     return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3067 
3068   if (PrevDecl) {
3069     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous decl has no TypeForDecl");
3070     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
3071     return QualType(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3072   }
3073 
3074   // Prefer the definition, if there is one.
3075   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Def = Decl->getDefinition())
3076     Decl = Def;
3077 
3078   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCInterfaceType), TypeAlignment);
3079   ObjCInterfaceType *T = new (Mem) ObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
3080   Decl->TypeForDecl = T;
3081   Types.push_back(T);
3082   return QualType(T, 0);
3083 }
3084 
3085 /// getTypeOfExprType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we can't unique
3086 /// TypeOfExprType AST's (since expression's are never shared). For example,
3087 /// multiple declarations that refer to "typeof(x)" all contain different
3088 /// DeclRefExpr's. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3089 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3090 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfExprType(Expr *tofExpr) const {
3091   TypeOfExprType *toe;
3092   if (tofExpr->isTypeDependent()) {
3093     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3094     DependentTypeOfExprType::Profile(ID, *this, tofExpr);
3095 
3096     void *InsertPos = 0;
3097     DependentTypeOfExprType *Canon
3098       = DependentTypeOfExprTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3099     if (Canon) {
3100       // We already have a "canonical" version of an identical, dependent
3101       // typeof(expr) type. Use that as our canonical type.
3102       toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr,
3103                                           QualType((TypeOfExprType*)Canon, 0));
3104     } else {
3105       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3106       Canon
3107         = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentTypeOfExprType(*this, tofExpr);
3108       DependentTypeOfExprTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3109       toe = Canon;
3110     }
3111   } else {
3112     QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofExpr->getType());
3113     toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, Canonical);
3114   }
3115   Types.push_back(toe);
3116   return QualType(toe, 0);
3117 }
3118 
3119 /// getTypeOfType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3120 /// TypeOfType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3121 /// memory savings. Since typeof(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3122 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3123 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3124 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const {
3125   QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofType);
3126   TypeOfType *tot = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfType(tofType, Canonical);
3127   Types.push_back(tot);
3128   return QualType(tot, 0);
3129 }
3130 
3131 
3132 /// getDecltypeType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3133 /// DecltypeType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3134 /// memory savings. Since decltype(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3135 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3136 /// on canonical types (which are always unique).
3137 QualType ASTContext::getDecltypeType(Expr *e, QualType UnderlyingType) const {
3138   DecltypeType *dt;
3139 
3140   // C++0x [temp.type]p2:
3141   //   If an expression e involves a template parameter, decltype(e) denotes a
3142   //   unique dependent type. Two such decltype-specifiers refer to the same
3143   //   type only if their expressions are equivalent (14.5.6.1).
3144   if (e->isInstantiationDependent()) {
3145     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3146     DependentDecltypeType::Profile(ID, *this, e);
3147 
3148     void *InsertPos = 0;
3149     DependentDecltypeType *Canon
3150       = DependentDecltypeTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3151     if (Canon) {
3152       // We already have a "canonical" version of an equivalent, dependent
3153       // decltype type. Use that as our canonical type.
3154       dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, DependentTy,
3155                                        QualType((DecltypeType*)Canon, 0));
3156     } else {
3157       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3158       Canon = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentDecltypeType(*this, e);
3159       DependentDecltypeTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3160       dt = Canon;
3161     }
3162   } else {
3163     dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3164                                       getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3165   }
3166   Types.push_back(dt);
3167   return QualType(dt, 0);
3168 }
3169 
3170 /// getUnaryTransformationType - We don't unique these, since the memory
3171 /// savings are minimal and these are rare.
3172 QualType ASTContext::getUnaryTransformType(QualType BaseType,
3173                                            QualType UnderlyingType,
3174                                            UnaryTransformType::UTTKind Kind)
3175     const {
3176   UnaryTransformType *Ty =
3177     new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnaryTransformType (BaseType, UnderlyingType,
3178                                                    Kind,
3179                                  UnderlyingType->isDependentType() ?
3180                                  QualType() : getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3181   Types.push_back(Ty);
3182   return QualType(Ty, 0);
3183 }
3184 
3185 /// getAutoType - We only unique auto types after they've been deduced.
3186 QualType ASTContext::getAutoType(QualType DeducedType) const {
3187   void *InsertPos = 0;
3188   if (!DeducedType.isNull()) {
3189     // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3190     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3191     AutoType::Profile(ID, DeducedType);
3192     if (AutoType *AT = AutoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3193       return QualType(AT, 0);
3194   }
3195 
3196   AutoType *AT = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AutoType(DeducedType);
3197   Types.push_back(AT);
3198   if (InsertPos)
3199     AutoTypes.InsertNode(AT, InsertPos);
3200   return QualType(AT, 0);
3201 }
3202 
3203 /// getAtomicType - Return the uniqued reference to the atomic type for
3204 /// the given value type.
3205 QualType ASTContext::getAtomicType(QualType T) const {
3206   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
3207   // structure.
3208   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3209   AtomicType::Profile(ID, T);
3210 
3211   void *InsertPos = 0;
3212   if (AtomicType *AT = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3213     return QualType(AT, 0);
3214 
3215   // If the atomic value type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
3216   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
3217   QualType Canonical;
3218   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
3219     Canonical = getAtomicType(getCanonicalType(T));
3220 
3221     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
3222     AtomicType *NewIP = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3223     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
3224   }
3225   AtomicType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AtomicType(T, Canonical);
3226   Types.push_back(New);
3227   AtomicTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
3228   return QualType(New, 0);
3229 }
3230 
3231 /// getAutoDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto'.
3232 QualType ASTContext::getAutoDeductType() const {
3233   if (AutoDeductTy.isNull())
3234     AutoDeductTy = getAutoType(QualType());
3235   assert(!AutoDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto' pattern");
3236   return AutoDeductTy;
3237 }
3238 
3239 /// getAutoRRefDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto &&'.
3240 QualType ASTContext::getAutoRRefDeductType() const {
3241   if (AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull())
3242     AutoRRefDeductTy = getRValueReferenceType(getAutoDeductType());
3243   assert(!AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto &&' pattern");
3244   return AutoRRefDeductTy;
3245 }
3246 
3247 /// getTagDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3248 /// specified TagDecl (struct/union/class/enum) decl.
3249 QualType ASTContext::getTagDeclType(const TagDecl *Decl) const {
3250   assert (Decl);
3251   // FIXME: What is the design on getTagDeclType when it requires casting
3252   // away const?  mutable?
3253   return getTypeDeclType(const_cast<TagDecl*>(Decl));
3254 }
3255 
3256 /// getSizeType - Return the unique type for "size_t" (C99 7.17), the result
3257 /// of the sizeof operator (C99 6.5.3.4p4). The value is target dependent and
3258 /// needs to agree with the definition in <stddef.h>.
3259 CanQualType ASTContext::getSizeType() const {
3260   return getFromTargetType(Target->getSizeType());
3261 }
3262 
3263 /// getIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "intmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3264 CanQualType ASTContext::getIntMaxType() const {
3265   return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntMaxType());
3266 }
3267 
3268 /// getUIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "uintmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3269 CanQualType ASTContext::getUIntMaxType() const {
3270   return getFromTargetType(Target->getUIntMaxType());
3271 }
3272 
3273 /// getSignedWCharType - Return the type of "signed wchar_t".
3274 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3275 QualType ASTContext::getSignedWCharType() const {
3276   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3277   return WCharTy;
3278 }
3279 
3280 /// getUnsignedWCharType - Return the type of "unsigned wchar_t".
3281 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3282 QualType ASTContext::getUnsignedWCharType() const {
3283   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3284   return UnsignedIntTy;
3285 }
3286 
3287 /// getPointerDiffType - Return the unique type for "ptrdiff_t" (C99 7.17)
3288 /// defined in <stddef.h>. Pointer - pointer requires this (C99 6.5.6p9).
3289 QualType ASTContext::getPointerDiffType() const {
3290   return getFromTargetType(Target->getPtrDiffType(0));
3291 }
3292 
3293 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3294 //                              Type Operators
3295 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3296 
3297 CanQualType ASTContext::getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const {
3298   // Push qualifiers into arrays, and then discard any remaining
3299   // qualifiers.
3300   T = getCanonicalType(T);
3301   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3302   const Type *Ty = T.getTypePtr();
3303   QualType Result;
3304   if (isa<ArrayType>(Ty)) {
3305     Result = getArrayDecayedType(QualType(Ty,0));
3306   } else if (isa<FunctionType>(Ty)) {
3307     Result = getPointerType(QualType(Ty, 0));
3308   } else {
3309     Result = QualType(Ty, 0);
3310   }
3311 
3312   return CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(Result);
3313 }
3314 
3315 QualType ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type,
3316                                              Qualifiers &quals) {
3317   SplitQualType splitType = type.getSplitUnqualifiedType();
3318 
3319   // FIXME: getSplitUnqualifiedType() actually walks all the way to
3320   // the unqualified desugared type and then drops it on the floor.
3321   // We then have to strip that sugar back off with
3322   // getUnqualifiedDesugaredType(), which is silly.
3323   const ArrayType *AT =
3324     dyn_cast<ArrayType>(splitType.Ty->getUnqualifiedDesugaredType());
3325 
3326   // If we don't have an array, just use the results in splitType.
3327   if (!AT) {
3328     quals = splitType.Quals;
3329     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3330   }
3331 
3332   // Otherwise, recurse on the array's element type.
3333   QualType elementType = AT->getElementType();
3334   QualType unqualElementType = getUnqualifiedArrayType(elementType, quals);
3335 
3336   // If that didn't change the element type, AT has no qualifiers, so we
3337   // can just use the results in splitType.
3338   if (elementType == unqualElementType) {
3339     assert(quals.empty()); // from the recursive call
3340     quals = splitType.Quals;
3341     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3342   }
3343 
3344   // Otherwise, add in the qualifiers from the outermost type, then
3345   // build the type back up.
3346   quals.addConsistentQualifiers(splitType.Quals);
3347 
3348   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
3349     return getConstantArrayType(unqualElementType, CAT->getSize(),
3350                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3351   }
3352 
3353   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) {
3354     return getIncompleteArrayType(unqualElementType, IAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3355   }
3356 
3357   if (const VariableArrayType *VAT = dyn_cast<VariableArrayType>(AT)) {
3358     return getVariableArrayType(unqualElementType,
3359                                 VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3360                                 VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3361                                 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3362                                 VAT->getBracketsRange());
3363   }
3364 
3365   const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(AT);
3366   return getDependentSizedArrayType(unqualElementType, DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3367                                     DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 0,
3368                                     SourceRange());
3369 }
3370 
3371 /// UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes - If T1 and T2 are pointer types  that
3372 /// may be similar (C++ 4.4), replaces T1 and T2 with the type that
3373 /// they point to and return true. If T1 and T2 aren't pointer types
3374 /// or pointer-to-member types, or if they are not similar at this
3375 /// level, returns false and leaves T1 and T2 unchanged. Top-level
3376 /// qualifiers on T1 and T2 are ignored. This function will typically
3377 /// be called in a loop that successively "unwraps" pointer and
3378 /// pointer-to-member types to compare them at each level.
3379 bool ASTContext::UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType &T1, QualType &T2) {
3380   const PointerType *T1PtrType = T1->getAs<PointerType>(),
3381                     *T2PtrType = T2->getAs<PointerType>();
3382   if (T1PtrType && T2PtrType) {
3383     T1 = T1PtrType->getPointeeType();
3384     T2 = T2PtrType->getPointeeType();
3385     return true;
3386   }
3387 
3388   const MemberPointerType *T1MPType = T1->getAs<MemberPointerType>(),
3389                           *T2MPType = T2->getAs<MemberPointerType>();
3390   if (T1MPType && T2MPType &&
3391       hasSameUnqualifiedType(QualType(T1MPType->getClass(), 0),
3392                              QualType(T2MPType->getClass(), 0))) {
3393     T1 = T1MPType->getPointeeType();
3394     T2 = T2MPType->getPointeeType();
3395     return true;
3396   }
3397 
3398   if (getLangOpts().ObjC1) {
3399     const ObjCObjectPointerType *T1OPType = T1->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
3400                                 *T2OPType = T2->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
3401     if (T1OPType && T2OPType) {
3402       T1 = T1OPType->getPointeeType();
3403       T2 = T2OPType->getPointeeType();
3404       return true;
3405     }
3406   }
3407 
3408   // FIXME: Block pointers, too?
3409 
3410   return false;
3411 }
3412 
3413 DeclarationNameInfo
3414 ASTContext::getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name,
3415                                SourceLocation NameLoc) const {
3416   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3417   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3418   case TemplateName::Template:
3419     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3420     return DeclarationNameInfo(Name.getAsTemplateDecl()->getDeclName(),
3421                                NameLoc);
3422 
3423   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate: {
3424     OverloadedTemplateStorage *Storage = Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate();
3425     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3426     return DeclarationNameInfo((*Storage->begin())->getDeclName(), NameLoc);
3427   }
3428 
3429   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3430     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3431     DeclarationName DName;
3432     if (DTN->isIdentifier()) {
3433       DName = DeclarationNames.getIdentifier(DTN->getIdentifier());
3434       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc);
3435     } else {
3436       DName = DeclarationNames.getCXXOperatorName(DTN->getOperator());
3437       // DNInfo work in progress: FIXME: source locations?
3438       DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc;
3439       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.BeginOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3440       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.EndOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3441       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc, DNLoc);
3442     }
3443   }
3444 
3445   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3446     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3447       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3448     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameter()->getDeclName(),
3449                                NameLoc);
3450   }
3451 
3452   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3453     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3454       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3455     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameterPack()->getDeclName(),
3456                                NameLoc);
3457   }
3458   }
3459 
3460   llvm_unreachable("bad template name kind!");
3461 }
3462 
3463 TemplateName ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const {
3464   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3465   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3466   case TemplateName::Template: {
3467     TemplateDecl *Template = Name.getAsTemplateDecl();
3468     if (TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP
3469           = dyn_cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(Template))
3470       Template = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TTP);
3471 
3472     // The canonical template name is the canonical template declaration.
3473     return TemplateName(cast<TemplateDecl>(Template->getCanonicalDecl()));
3474   }
3475 
3476   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate:
3477     llvm_unreachable("cannot canonicalize overloaded template");
3478 
3479   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3480     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3481     assert(DTN && "Non-dependent template names must refer to template decls.");
3482     return DTN->CanonicalTemplateName;
3483   }
3484 
3485   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3486     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3487       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3488     return getCanonicalTemplateName(subst->getReplacement());
3489   }
3490 
3491   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3492     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3493                                   = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3494     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *canonParameter
3495       = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(subst->getParameterPack());
3496     TemplateArgument canonArgPack
3497       = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(subst->getArgumentPack());
3498     return getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(canonParameter, canonArgPack);
3499   }
3500   }
3501 
3502   llvm_unreachable("bad template name!");
3503 }
3504 
3505 bool ASTContext::hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X, TemplateName Y) {
3506   X = getCanonicalTemplateName(X);
3507   Y = getCanonicalTemplateName(Y);
3508   return X.getAsVoidPointer() == Y.getAsVoidPointer();
3509 }
3510 
3511 TemplateArgument
3512 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument &Arg) const {
3513   switch (Arg.getKind()) {
3514     case TemplateArgument::Null:
3515       return Arg;
3516 
3517     case TemplateArgument::Expression:
3518       return Arg;
3519 
3520     case TemplateArgument::Declaration: {
3521       if (Decl *D = Arg.getAsDecl())
3522           return TemplateArgument(D->getCanonicalDecl());
3523       return TemplateArgument((Decl*)0);
3524     }
3525 
3526     case TemplateArgument::Template:
3527       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(Arg.getAsTemplate()));
3528 
3529     case TemplateArgument::TemplateExpansion:
3530       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(
3531                                          Arg.getAsTemplateOrTemplatePattern()),
3532                               Arg.getNumTemplateExpansions());
3533 
3534     case TemplateArgument::Integral:
3535       return TemplateArgument(Arg, getCanonicalType(Arg.getIntegralType()));
3536 
3537     case TemplateArgument::Type:
3538       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getAsType()));
3539 
3540     case TemplateArgument::Pack: {
3541       if (Arg.pack_size() == 0)
3542         return Arg;
3543 
3544       TemplateArgument *CanonArgs
3545         = new (*this) TemplateArgument[Arg.pack_size()];
3546       unsigned Idx = 0;
3547       for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator A = Arg.pack_begin(),
3548                                         AEnd = Arg.pack_end();
3549            A != AEnd; (void)++A, ++Idx)
3550         CanonArgs[Idx] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(*A);
3551 
3552       return TemplateArgument(CanonArgs, Arg.pack_size());
3553     }
3554   }
3555 
3556   // Silence GCC warning
3557   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled template argument kind");
3558 }
3559 
3560 NestedNameSpecifier *
3561 ASTContext::getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS) const {
3562   if (!NNS)
3563     return 0;
3564 
3565   switch (NNS->getKind()) {
3566   case NestedNameSpecifier::Identifier:
3567     // Canonicalize the prefix but keep the identifier the same.
3568     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this,
3569                          getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS->getPrefix()),
3570                                        NNS->getAsIdentifier());
3571 
3572   case NestedNameSpecifier::Namespace:
3573     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3574     // this namespace and no prefix.
3575     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3576                                  NNS->getAsNamespace()->getOriginalNamespace());
3577 
3578   case NestedNameSpecifier::NamespaceAlias:
3579     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3580     // this namespace and no prefix.
3581     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3582                                     NNS->getAsNamespaceAlias()->getNamespace()
3583                                                       ->getOriginalNamespace());
3584 
3585   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpec:
3586   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpecWithTemplate: {
3587     QualType T = getCanonicalType(QualType(NNS->getAsType(), 0));
3588 
3589     // If we have some kind of dependent-named type (e.g., "typename T::type"),
3590     // break it apart into its prefix and identifier, then reconsititute those
3591     // as the canonical nested-name-specifier. This is required to canonicalize
3592     // a dependent nested-name-specifier involving typedefs of dependent-name
3593     // types, e.g.,
3594     //   typedef typename T::type T1;
3595     //   typedef typename T1::type T2;
3596     if (const DependentNameType *DNT = T->getAs<DependentNameType>())
3597       return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, DNT->getQualifier(),
3598                            const_cast<IdentifierInfo *>(DNT->getIdentifier()));
3599 
3600     // Otherwise, just canonicalize the type, and force it to be a TypeSpec.
3601     // FIXME: Why are TypeSpec and TypeSpecWithTemplate distinct in the
3602     // first place?
3603     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, false,
3604                                        const_cast<Type*>(T.getTypePtr()));
3605   }
3606 
3607   case NestedNameSpecifier::Global:
3608     // The global specifier is canonical and unique.
3609     return NNS;
3610   }
3611 
3612   llvm_unreachable("Invalid NestedNameSpecifier::Kind!");
3613 }
3614 
3615 
3616 const ArrayType *ASTContext::getAsArrayType(QualType T) const {
3617   // Handle the non-qualified case efficiently.
3618   if (!T.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
3619     // Handle the common positive case fast.
3620     if (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T))
3621       return AT;
3622   }
3623 
3624   // Handle the common negative case fast.
3625   if (!isa<ArrayType>(T.getCanonicalType()))
3626     return 0;
3627 
3628   // Apply any qualifiers from the array type to the element type.  This
3629   // implements C99 6.7.3p8: "If the specification of an array type includes
3630   // any type qualifiers, the element type is so qualified, not the array type."
3631 
3632   // If we get here, we either have type qualifiers on the type, or we have
3633   // sugar such as a typedef in the way.  If we have type qualifiers on the type
3634   // we must propagate them down into the element type.
3635 
3636   SplitQualType split = T.getSplitDesugaredType();
3637   Qualifiers qs = split.Quals;
3638 
3639   // If we have a simple case, just return now.
3640   const ArrayType *ATy = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(split.Ty);
3641   if (ATy == 0 || qs.empty())
3642     return ATy;
3643 
3644   // Otherwise, we have an array and we have qualifiers on it.  Push the
3645   // qualifiers into the array element type and return a new array type.
3646   QualType NewEltTy = getQualifiedType(ATy->getElementType(), qs);
3647 
3648   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(ATy))
3649     return cast<ArrayType>(getConstantArrayType(NewEltTy, CAT->getSize(),
3650                                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(),
3651                                            CAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3652   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ATy))
3653     return cast<ArrayType>(getIncompleteArrayType(NewEltTy,
3654                                                   IAT->getSizeModifier(),
3655                                            IAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3656 
3657   if (const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT
3658         = dyn_cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ATy))
3659     return cast<ArrayType>(
3660                      getDependentSizedArrayType(NewEltTy,
3661                                                 DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3662                                                 DSAT->getSizeModifier(),
3663                                               DSAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3664                                                 DSAT->getBracketsRange()));
3665 
3666   const VariableArrayType *VAT = cast<VariableArrayType>(ATy);
3667   return cast<ArrayType>(getVariableArrayType(NewEltTy,
3668                                               VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3669                                               VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3670                                               VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3671                                               VAT->getBracketsRange()));
3672 }
3673 
3674 QualType ASTContext::getAdjustedParameterType(QualType T) const {
3675   // C99 6.7.5.3p7:
3676   //   A declaration of a parameter as "array of type" shall be
3677   //   adjusted to "qualified pointer to type", where the type
3678   //   qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of
3679   //   the array type derivation.
3680   if (T->isArrayType())
3681     return getArrayDecayedType(T);
3682 
3683   // C99 6.7.5.3p8:
3684   //   A declaration of a parameter as "function returning type"
3685   //   shall be adjusted to "pointer to function returning type", as
3686   //   in 6.3.2.1.
3687   if (T->isFunctionType())
3688     return getPointerType(T);
3689 
3690   return T;
3691 }
3692 
3693 QualType ASTContext::getSignatureParameterType(QualType T) const {
3694   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3695   T = getAdjustedParameterType(T);
3696   return T.getUnqualifiedType();
3697 }
3698 
3699 /// getArrayDecayedType - Return the properly qualified result of decaying the
3700 /// specified array type to a pointer.  This operation is non-trivial when
3701 /// handling typedefs etc.  The canonical type of "T" must be an array type,
3702 /// this returns a pointer to a properly qualified element of the array.
3703 ///
3704 /// See C99 6.7.5.3p7 and C99 6.3.2.1p3.
3705 QualType ASTContext::getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const {
3706   // Get the element type with 'getAsArrayType' so that we don't lose any
3707   // typedefs in the element type of the array.  This also handles propagation
3708   // of type qualifiers from the array type into the element type if present
3709   // (C99 6.7.3p8).
3710   const ArrayType *PrettyArrayType = getAsArrayType(Ty);
3711   assert(PrettyArrayType && "Not an array type!");
3712 
3713   QualType PtrTy = getPointerType(PrettyArrayType->getElementType());
3714 
3715   // int x[restrict 4] ->  int *restrict
3716   return getQualifiedType(PtrTy, PrettyArrayType->getIndexTypeQualifiers());
3717 }
3718 
3719 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(const ArrayType *array) const {
3720   return getBaseElementType(array->getElementType());
3721 }
3722 
3723 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(QualType type) const {
3724   Qualifiers qs;
3725   while (true) {
3726     SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
3727     const ArrayType *array = split.Ty->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe();
3728     if (!array) break;
3729 
3730     type = array->getElementType();
3731     qs.addConsistentQualifiers(split.Quals);
3732   }
3733 
3734   return getQualifiedType(type, qs);
3735 }
3736 
3737 /// getConstantArrayElementCount - Returns number of constant array elements.
3738 uint64_t
3739 ASTContext::getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType *CA)  const {
3740   uint64_t ElementCount = 1;
3741   do {
3742     ElementCount *= CA->getSize().getZExtValue();
3743     CA = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(CA->getElementType());
3744   } while (CA);
3745   return ElementCount;
3746 }
3747 
3748 /// getFloatingRank - Return a relative rank for floating point types.
3749 /// This routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't a float.
3750 static FloatingRank getFloatingRank(QualType T) {
3751   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
3752     return getFloatingRank(CT->getElementType());
3753 
3754   assert(T->getAs<BuiltinType>() && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
3755   switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
3756   default: llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
3757   case BuiltinType::Half:       return HalfRank;
3758   case BuiltinType::Float:      return FloatRank;
3759   case BuiltinType::Double:     return DoubleRank;
3760   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return LongDoubleRank;
3761   }
3762 }
3763 
3764 /// getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain - Returns a real floating
3765 /// point or a complex type (based on typeDomain/typeSize).
3766 /// 'typeDomain' is a real floating point or complex type.
3767 /// 'typeSize' is a real floating point or complex type.
3768 QualType ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size,
3769                                                        QualType Domain) const {
3770   FloatingRank EltRank = getFloatingRank(Size);
3771   if (Domain->isComplexType()) {
3772     switch (EltRank) {
3773     case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Complex half is not supported");
3774     case FloatRank:      return FloatComplexTy;
3775     case DoubleRank:     return DoubleComplexTy;
3776     case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleComplexTy;
3777     }
3778   }
3779 
3780   assert(Domain->isRealFloatingType() && "Unknown domain!");
3781   switch (EltRank) {
3782   case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Half ranks are not valid here");
3783   case FloatRank:      return FloatTy;
3784   case DoubleRank:     return DoubleTy;
3785   case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleTy;
3786   }
3787   llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank");
3788 }
3789 
3790 /// getFloatingTypeOrder - Compare the rank of the two specified floating
3791 /// point types, ignoring the domain of the type (i.e. 'double' ==
3792 /// '_Complex double').  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
3793 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
3794 int ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
3795   FloatingRank LHSR = getFloatingRank(LHS);
3796   FloatingRank RHSR = getFloatingRank(RHS);
3797 
3798   if (LHSR == RHSR)
3799     return 0;
3800   if (LHSR > RHSR)
3801     return 1;
3802   return -1;
3803 }
3804 
3805 /// getIntegerRank - Return an integer conversion rank (C99 6.3.1.1p1). This
3806 /// routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't an integer or enum,
3807 /// or if it is not canonicalized.
3808 unsigned ASTContext::getIntegerRank(const Type *T) const {
3809   assert(T->isCanonicalUnqualified() && "T should be canonicalized");
3810 
3811   switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
3812   default: llvm_unreachable("getIntegerRank(): not a built-in integer");
3813   case BuiltinType::Bool:
3814     return 1 + (getIntWidth(BoolTy) << 3);
3815   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
3816   case BuiltinType::Char_U:
3817   case BuiltinType::SChar:
3818   case BuiltinType::UChar:
3819     return 2 + (getIntWidth(CharTy) << 3);
3820   case BuiltinType::Short:
3821   case BuiltinType::UShort:
3822     return 3 + (getIntWidth(ShortTy) << 3);
3823   case BuiltinType::Int:
3824   case BuiltinType::UInt:
3825     return 4 + (getIntWidth(IntTy) << 3);
3826   case BuiltinType::Long:
3827   case BuiltinType::ULong:
3828     return 5 + (getIntWidth(LongTy) << 3);
3829   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
3830   case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
3831     return 6 + (getIntWidth(LongLongTy) << 3);
3832   case BuiltinType::Int128:
3833   case BuiltinType::UInt128:
3834     return 7 + (getIntWidth(Int128Ty) << 3);
3835   }
3836 }
3837 
3838 /// \brief Whether this is a promotable bitfield reference according
3839 /// to C99 6.3.1.1p2, bullet 2 (and GCC extensions).
3840 ///
3841 /// \returns the type this bit-field will promote to, or NULL if no
3842 /// promotion occurs.
3843 QualType ASTContext::isPromotableBitField(Expr *E) const {
3844   if (E->isTypeDependent() || E->isValueDependent())
3845     return QualType();
3846 
3847   FieldDecl *Field = E->getBitField();
3848   if (!Field)
3849     return QualType();
3850 
3851   QualType FT = Field->getType();
3852 
3853   uint64_t BitWidth = Field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
3854   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
3855   // GCC extension compatibility: if the bit-field size is less than or equal
3856   // to the size of int, it gets promoted no matter what its type is.
3857   // For instance, unsigned long bf : 4 gets promoted to signed int.
3858   if (BitWidth < IntSize)
3859     return IntTy;
3860 
3861   if (BitWidth == IntSize)
3862     return FT->isSignedIntegerType() ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
3863 
3864   // Types bigger than int are not subject to promotions, and therefore act
3865   // like the base type.
3866   // FIXME: This doesn't quite match what gcc does, but what gcc does here
3867   // is ridiculous.
3868   return QualType();
3869 }
3870 
3871 /// getPromotedIntegerType - Returns the type that Promotable will
3872 /// promote to: C99 6.3.1.1p2, assuming that Promotable is a promotable
3873 /// integer type.
3874 QualType ASTContext::getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const {
3875   assert(!Promotable.isNull());
3876   assert(Promotable->isPromotableIntegerType());
3877   if (const EnumType *ET = Promotable->getAs<EnumType>())
3878     return ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType();
3879 
3880   if (const BuiltinType *BT = Promotable->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
3881     // C++ [conv.prom]: A prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, or wchar_t
3882     // (3.9.1) can be converted to a prvalue of the first of the following
3883     // types that can represent all the values of its underlying type:
3884     // int, unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or
3885     // unsigned long long int [...]
3886     // FIXME: Is there some better way to compute this?
3887     if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S ||
3888         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_U ||
3889         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char16 ||
3890         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char32) {
3891       bool FromIsSigned = BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S;
3892       uint64_t FromSize = getTypeSize(BT);
3893       QualType PromoteTypes[] = { IntTy, UnsignedIntTy, LongTy, UnsignedLongTy,
3894                                   LongLongTy, UnsignedLongLongTy };
3895       for (size_t Idx = 0; Idx < llvm::array_lengthof(PromoteTypes); ++Idx) {
3896         uint64_t ToSize = getTypeSize(PromoteTypes[Idx]);
3897         if (FromSize < ToSize ||
3898             (FromSize == ToSize &&
3899              FromIsSigned == PromoteTypes[Idx]->isSignedIntegerType()))
3900           return PromoteTypes[Idx];
3901       }
3902       llvm_unreachable("char type should fit into long long");
3903     }
3904   }
3905 
3906   // At this point, we should have a signed or unsigned integer type.
3907   if (Promotable->isSignedIntegerType())
3908     return IntTy;
3909   uint64_t PromotableSize = getTypeSize(Promotable);
3910   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
3911   assert(Promotable->isUnsignedIntegerType() && PromotableSize <= IntSize);
3912   return (PromotableSize != IntSize) ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
3913 }
3914 
3915 /// \brief Recurses in pointer/array types until it finds an objc retainable
3916 /// type and returns its ownership.
3917 Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime ASTContext::getInnerObjCOwnership(QualType T) const {
3918   while (!T.isNull()) {
3919     if (T.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_None)
3920       return T.getObjCLifetime();
3921     if (T->isArrayType())
3922       T = getBaseElementType(T);
3923     else if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>())
3924       T = PT->getPointeeType();
3925     else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
3926       T = RT->getPointeeType();
3927     else
3928       break;
3929   }
3930 
3931   return Qualifiers::OCL_None;
3932 }
3933 
3934 /// getIntegerTypeOrder - Returns the highest ranked integer type:
3935 /// C99 6.3.1.8p1.  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
3936 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
3937 int ASTContext::getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
3938   const Type *LHSC = getCanonicalType(LHS).getTypePtr();
3939   const Type *RHSC = getCanonicalType(RHS).getTypePtr();
3940   if (LHSC == RHSC) return 0;
3941 
3942   bool LHSUnsigned = LHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
3943   bool RHSUnsigned = RHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
3944 
3945   unsigned LHSRank = getIntegerRank(LHSC);
3946   unsigned RHSRank = getIntegerRank(RHSC);
3947 
3948   if (LHSUnsigned == RHSUnsigned) {  // Both signed or both unsigned.
3949     if (LHSRank == RHSRank) return 0;
3950     return LHSRank > RHSRank ? 1 : -1;
3951   }
3952 
3953   // Otherwise, the LHS is signed and the RHS is unsigned or visa versa.
3954   if (LHSUnsigned) {
3955     // If the unsigned [LHS] type is larger, return it.
3956     if (LHSRank >= RHSRank)
3957       return 1;
3958 
3959     // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
3960     // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
3961     // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
3962     return -1;
3963   }
3964 
3965   // If the unsigned [RHS] type is larger, return it.
3966   if (RHSRank >= LHSRank)
3967     return -1;
3968 
3969   // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
3970   // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
3971   // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
3972   return 1;
3973 }
3974 
3975 static RecordDecl *
3976 CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext &Ctx, RecordDecl::TagKind TK,
3977                  DeclContext *DC, IdentifierInfo *Id) {
3978   SourceLocation Loc;
3979   if (Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
3980     return CXXRecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
3981   else
3982     return RecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
3983 }
3984 
3985 // getCFConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant CFStrings.
3986 QualType ASTContext::getCFConstantStringType() const {
3987   if (!CFConstantStringTypeDecl) {
3988     CFConstantStringTypeDecl =
3989       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
3990                        &Idents.get("NSConstantString"));
3991     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition();
3992 
3993     QualType FieldTypes[4];
3994 
3995     // const int *isa;
3996     FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst());
3997     // int flags;
3998     FieldTypes[1] = IntTy;
3999     // const char *str;
4000     FieldTypes[2] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst());
4001     // long length;
4002     FieldTypes[3] = LongTy;
4003 
4004     // Create fields
4005     for (unsigned i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4006       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, CFConstantStringTypeDecl,
4007                                            SourceLocation(),
4008                                            SourceLocation(), 0,
4009                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4010                                            /*BitWidth=*/0,
4011                                            /*Mutable=*/false,
4012                                            ICIS_NoInit);
4013       Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4014       CFConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field);
4015     }
4016 
4017     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition();
4018   }
4019 
4020   return getTagDeclType(CFConstantStringTypeDecl);
4021 }
4022 
4023 void ASTContext::setCFConstantStringType(QualType T) {
4024   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>();
4025   assert(Rec && "Invalid CFConstantStringType");
4026   CFConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl();
4027 }
4028 
4029 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorType() const {
4030   if (BlockDescriptorType)
4031     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4032 
4033   RecordDecl *T;
4034   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4035   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4036                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor"));
4037   T->startDefinition();
4038 
4039   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4040     UnsignedLongTy,
4041     UnsignedLongTy,
4042   };
4043 
4044   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4045     "reserved",
4046     "Size"
4047   };
4048 
4049   for (size_t i = 0; i < 2; ++i) {
4050     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4051                                          SourceLocation(),
4052                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4053                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4054                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4055                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4056                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4057     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4058     T->addDecl(Field);
4059   }
4060 
4061   T->completeDefinition();
4062 
4063   BlockDescriptorType = T;
4064 
4065   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4066 }
4067 
4068 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const {
4069   if (BlockDescriptorExtendedType)
4070     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4071 
4072   RecordDecl *T;
4073   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4074   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4075                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor_withcopydispose"));
4076   T->startDefinition();
4077 
4078   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4079     UnsignedLongTy,
4080     UnsignedLongTy,
4081     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4082     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy)
4083   };
4084 
4085   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4086     "reserved",
4087     "Size",
4088     "CopyFuncPtr",
4089     "DestroyFuncPtr"
4090   };
4091 
4092   for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4093     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4094                                          SourceLocation(),
4095                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4096                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4097                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4098                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4099                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4100     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4101     T->addDecl(Field);
4102   }
4103 
4104   T->completeDefinition();
4105 
4106   BlockDescriptorExtendedType = T;
4107 
4108   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4109 }
4110 
4111 bool ASTContext::BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty) const {
4112   if (Ty->isObjCRetainableType())
4113     return true;
4114   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
4115     if (const RecordType *RT = Ty->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4116       CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl());
4117       return RD->hasConstCopyConstructor();
4118 
4119     }
4120   }
4121   return false;
4122 }
4123 
4124 QualType
4125 ASTContext::BuildByRefType(StringRef DeclName, QualType Ty) const {
4126   //  type = struct __Block_byref_1_X {
4127   //    void *__isa;
4128   //    struct __Block_byref_1_X *__forwarding;
4129   //    unsigned int __flags;
4130   //    unsigned int __size;
4131   //    void *__copy_helper;            // as needed
4132   //    void *__destroy_help            // as needed
4133   //    int X;
4134   //  } *
4135 
4136   bool HasCopyAndDispose = BlockRequiresCopying(Ty);
4137 
4138   // FIXME: Move up
4139   SmallString<36> Name;
4140   llvm::raw_svector_ostream(Name) << "__Block_byref_" <<
4141                                   ++UniqueBlockByRefTypeID << '_' << DeclName;
4142   RecordDecl *T;
4143   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, &Idents.get(Name.str()));
4144   T->startDefinition();
4145   QualType Int32Ty = IntTy;
4146   assert(getIntWidth(IntTy) == 32 && "non-32bit int not supported");
4147   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4148     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4149     getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T)),
4150     Int32Ty,
4151     Int32Ty,
4152     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4153     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4154     Ty
4155   };
4156 
4157   StringRef FieldNames[] = {
4158     "__isa",
4159     "__forwarding",
4160     "__flags",
4161     "__size",
4162     "__copy_helper",
4163     "__destroy_helper",
4164     DeclName,
4165   };
4166 
4167   for (size_t i = 0; i < 7; ++i) {
4168     if (!HasCopyAndDispose && i >=4 && i <= 5)
4169       continue;
4170     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4171                                          SourceLocation(),
4172                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4173                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4174                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, /*Mutable=*/false,
4175                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4176     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4177     T->addDecl(Field);
4178   }
4179 
4180   T->completeDefinition();
4181 
4182   return getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T));
4183 }
4184 
4185 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCInstanceTypeDecl() {
4186   if (!ObjCInstanceTypeDecl)
4187     ObjCInstanceTypeDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(*this,
4188                                                getTranslationUnitDecl(),
4189                                                SourceLocation(),
4190                                                SourceLocation(),
4191                                                &Idents.get("instancetype"),
4192                                      getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(getObjCIdType()));
4193   return ObjCInstanceTypeDecl;
4194 }
4195 
4196 // This returns true if a type has been typedefed to BOOL:
4197 // typedef <type> BOOL;
4198 static bool isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T) {
4199   if (const TypedefType *TT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(T))
4200     if (IdentifierInfo *II = TT->getDecl()->getIdentifier())
4201       return II->isStr("BOOL");
4202 
4203   return false;
4204 }
4205 
4206 /// getObjCEncodingTypeSize returns size of type for objective-c encoding
4207 /// purpose.
4208 CharUnits ASTContext::getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const {
4209   if (!type->isIncompleteArrayType() && type->isIncompleteType())
4210     return CharUnits::Zero();
4211 
4212   CharUnits sz = getTypeSizeInChars(type);
4213 
4214   // Make all integer and enum types at least as large as an int
4215   if (sz.isPositive() && type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType())
4216     sz = std::max(sz, getTypeSizeInChars(IntTy));
4217   // Treat arrays as pointers, since that's how they're passed in.
4218   else if (type->isArrayType())
4219     sz = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4220   return sz;
4221 }
4222 
4223 static inline
4224 std::string charUnitsToString(const CharUnits &CU) {
4225   return llvm::itostr(CU.getQuantity());
4226 }
4227 
4228 /// getObjCEncodingForBlock - Return the encoded type for this block
4229 /// declaration.
4230 std::string ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr *Expr) const {
4231   std::string S;
4232 
4233   const BlockDecl *Decl = Expr->getBlockDecl();
4234   QualType BlockTy =
4235       Expr->getType()->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4236   // Encode result type.
4237   getObjCEncodingForType(BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(), S);
4238   // Compute size of all parameters.
4239   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4240   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4241   SourceLocation Loc;
4242   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4243   CharUnits ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4244   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4245        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4246     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4247     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4248     if (sz.isZero())
4249       continue;
4250     assert (sz.isPositive() && "BlockExpr - Incomplete param type");
4251     ParmOffset += sz;
4252   }
4253   // Size of the argument frame
4254   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4255   // Block pointer and offset.
4256   S += "@?0";
4257 
4258   // Argument types.
4259   ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4260   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), E =
4261        Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4262     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4263     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4264     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4265           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4266       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4267       // elements.
4268       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4269         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4270     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4271       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4272     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4273     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4274     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4275   }
4276 
4277   return S;
4278 }
4279 
4280 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl *Decl,
4281                                                 std::string& S) {
4282   // Encode result type.
4283   getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S);
4284   CharUnits ParmOffset;
4285   // Compute size of all parameters.
4286   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4287        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4288     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4289     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4290     if (sz.isZero())
4291       continue;
4292 
4293     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4294         "getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl - Incomplete param type");
4295     ParmOffset += sz;
4296   }
4297   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4298   ParmOffset = CharUnits::Zero();
4299 
4300   // Argument types.
4301   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4302        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4303     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4304     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4305     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4306           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4307       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4308       // elements.
4309       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4310         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4311     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4312       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4313     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4314     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4315     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4316   }
4317 
4318   return false;
4319 }
4320 
4321 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter - Return the encoded type for a single
4322 /// method parameter or return type. If Extended, include class names and
4323 /// block object types.
4324 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
4325                                                    QualType T, std::string& S,
4326                                                    bool Extended) const {
4327   // Encode type qualifer, 'in', 'inout', etc. for the parameter.
4328   getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(QT, S);
4329   // Encode parameter type.
4330   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, 0,
4331                              true     /*OutermostType*/,
4332                              false    /*EncodingProperty*/,
4333                              false    /*StructField*/,
4334                              Extended /*EncodeBlockParameters*/,
4335                              Extended /*EncodeClassNames*/);
4336 }
4337 
4338 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Return the encoded type for this method
4339 /// declaration.
4340 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl *Decl,
4341                                               std::string& S,
4342                                               bool Extended) const {
4343   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4344   // Encode return type.
4345   getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4346                                     Decl->getResultType(), S, Extended);
4347   // Compute size of all parameters.
4348   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4349   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4350   SourceLocation Loc;
4351   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4352   // The first two arguments (self and _cmd) are pointers; account for
4353   // their size.
4354   CharUnits ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4355   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4356        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4357     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4358     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4359     if (sz.isZero())
4360       continue;
4361 
4362     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4363         "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type");
4364     ParmOffset += sz;
4365   }
4366   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4367   S += "@0:";
4368   S += charUnitsToString(PtrSize);
4369 
4370   // Argument types.
4371   ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4372   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4373        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4374     const ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4375     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4376     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4377           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4378       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4379       // elements.
4380       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4381         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4382     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4383       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4384     getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(PVDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4385                                       PType, S, Extended);
4386     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4387     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4388   }
4389 
4390   return false;
4391 }
4392 
4393 /// getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl - Return the encoded type for this
4394 /// property declaration. If non-NULL, Container must be either an
4395 /// ObjCCategoryImplDecl or ObjCImplementationDecl; it should only be
4396 /// NULL when getting encodings for protocol properties.
4397 /// Property attributes are stored as a comma-delimited C string. The simple
4398 /// attributes readonly and bycopy are encoded as single characters. The
4399 /// parametrized attributes, getter=name, setter=name, and ivar=name, are
4400 /// encoded as single characters, followed by an identifier. Property types
4401 /// are also encoded as a parametrized attribute. The characters used to encode
4402 /// these attributes are defined by the following enumeration:
4403 /// @code
4404 /// enum PropertyAttributes {
4405 /// kPropertyReadOnly = 'R',   // property is read-only.
4406 /// kPropertyBycopy = 'C',     // property is a copy of the value last assigned
4407 /// kPropertyByref = '&',  // property is a reference to the value last assigned
4408 /// kPropertyDynamic = 'D',    // property is dynamic
4409 /// kPropertyGetter = 'G',     // followed by getter selector name
4410 /// kPropertySetter = 'S',     // followed by setter selector name
4411 /// kPropertyInstanceVariable = 'V'  // followed by instance variable  name
4412 /// kPropertyType = 'T'              // followed by old-style type encoding.
4413 /// kPropertyWeak = 'W'              // 'weak' property
4414 /// kPropertyStrong = 'P'            // property GC'able
4415 /// kPropertyNonAtomic = 'N'         // property non-atomic
4416 /// };
4417 /// @endcode
4418 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl *PD,
4419                                                 const Decl *Container,
4420                                                 std::string& S) const {
4421   // Collect information from the property implementation decl(s).
4422   bool Dynamic = false;
4423   ObjCPropertyImplDecl *SynthesizePID = 0;
4424 
4425   // FIXME: Duplicated code due to poor abstraction.
4426   if (Container) {
4427     if (const ObjCCategoryImplDecl *CID =
4428         dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(Container)) {
4429       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4430              i = CID->propimpl_begin(), e = CID->propimpl_end();
4431            i != e; ++i) {
4432         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4433         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4434           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4435             Dynamic = true;
4436           } else {
4437             SynthesizePID = PID;
4438           }
4439         }
4440       }
4441     } else {
4442       const ObjCImplementationDecl *OID=cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(Container);
4443       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4444              i = OID->propimpl_begin(), e = OID->propimpl_end();
4445            i != e; ++i) {
4446         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4447         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4448           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4449             Dynamic = true;
4450           } else {
4451             SynthesizePID = PID;
4452           }
4453         }
4454       }
4455     }
4456   }
4457 
4458   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4459   S = "T";
4460 
4461   // Encode result type.
4462   // GCC has some special rules regarding encoding of properties which
4463   // closely resembles encoding of ivars.
4464   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PD->getType(), S, true, true, 0,
4465                              true /* outermost type */,
4466                              true /* encoding for property */);
4467 
4468   if (PD->isReadOnly()) {
4469     S += ",R";
4470   } else {
4471     switch (PD->getSetterKind()) {
4472     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Assign: break;
4473     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Copy:   S += ",C"; break;
4474     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Retain: S += ",&"; break;
4475     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Weak:   S += ",W"; break;
4476     }
4477   }
4478 
4479   // It really isn't clear at all what this means, since properties
4480   // are "dynamic by default".
4481   if (Dynamic)
4482     S += ",D";
4483 
4484   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_nonatomic)
4485     S += ",N";
4486 
4487   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_getter) {
4488     S += ",G";
4489     S += PD->getGetterName().getAsString();
4490   }
4491 
4492   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_setter) {
4493     S += ",S";
4494     S += PD->getSetterName().getAsString();
4495   }
4496 
4497   if (SynthesizePID) {
4498     const ObjCIvarDecl *OID = SynthesizePID->getPropertyIvarDecl();
4499     S += ",V";
4500     S += OID->getNameAsString();
4501   }
4502 
4503   // FIXME: OBJCGC: weak & strong
4504 }
4505 
4506 /// getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding -
4507 /// Another legacy compatibility encoding: 32-bit longs are encoded as
4508 /// 'l' or 'L' , but not always.  For typedefs, we need to use
4509 /// 'i' or 'I' instead if encoding a struct field, or a pointer!
4510 ///
4511 void ASTContext::getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding (QualType &PointeeTy) const {
4512   if (isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
4513     if (const BuiltinType *BT = PointeeTy->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4514       if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::ULong && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4515         PointeeTy = UnsignedIntTy;
4516       else
4517         if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Long && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4518           PointeeTy = IntTy;
4519     }
4520   }
4521 }
4522 
4523 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T, std::string& S,
4524                                         const FieldDecl *Field) const {
4525   // We follow the behavior of gcc, expanding structures which are
4526   // directly pointed to, and expanding embedded structures. Note that
4527   // these rules are sufficient to prevent recursive encoding of the
4528   // same type.
4529   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, Field,
4530                              true /* outermost type */);
4531 }
4532 
4533 static char ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext *C, QualType T) {
4534     switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
4535     default: llvm_unreachable("Unhandled builtin type kind");
4536     case BuiltinType::Void:       return 'v';
4537     case BuiltinType::Bool:       return 'B';
4538     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
4539     case BuiltinType::UChar:      return 'C';
4540     case BuiltinType::UShort:     return 'S';
4541     case BuiltinType::UInt:       return 'I';
4542     case BuiltinType::ULong:
4543         return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'L' : 'Q';
4544     case BuiltinType::UInt128:    return 'T';
4545     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:  return 'Q';
4546     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
4547     case BuiltinType::SChar:      return 'c';
4548     case BuiltinType::Short:      return 's';
4549     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
4550     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
4551     case BuiltinType::Int:        return 'i';
4552     case BuiltinType::Long:
4553       return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'l' : 'q';
4554     case BuiltinType::LongLong:   return 'q';
4555     case BuiltinType::Int128:     return 't';
4556     case BuiltinType::Float:      return 'f';
4557     case BuiltinType::Double:     return 'd';
4558     case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return 'D';
4559     }
4560 }
4561 
4562 static char ObjCEncodingForEnumType(const ASTContext *C, const EnumType *ET) {
4563   EnumDecl *Enum = ET->getDecl();
4564 
4565   // The encoding of an non-fixed enum type is always 'i', regardless of size.
4566   if (!Enum->isFixed())
4567     return 'i';
4568 
4569   // The encoding of a fixed enum type matches its fixed underlying type.
4570   return ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(C, Enum->getIntegerType());
4571 }
4572 
4573 static void EncodeBitField(const ASTContext *Ctx, std::string& S,
4574                            QualType T, const FieldDecl *FD) {
4575   assert(FD->isBitField() && "not a bitfield - getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl");
4576   S += 'b';
4577   // The NeXT runtime encodes bit fields as b followed by the number of bits.
4578   // The GNU runtime requires more information; bitfields are encoded as b,
4579   // then the offset (in bits) of the first element, then the type of the
4580   // bitfield, then the size in bits.  For example, in this structure:
4581   //
4582   // struct
4583   // {
4584   //    int integer;
4585   //    int flags:2;
4586   // };
4587   // On a 32-bit system, the encoding for flags would be b2 for the NeXT
4588   // runtime, but b32i2 for the GNU runtime.  The reason for this extra
4589   // information is not especially sensible, but we're stuck with it for
4590   // compatibility with GCC, although providing it breaks anything that
4591   // actually uses runtime introspection and wants to work on both runtimes...
4592   if (Ctx->getLangOpts().ObjCRuntime.isGNUFamily()) {
4593     const RecordDecl *RD = FD->getParent();
4594     const ASTRecordLayout &RL = Ctx->getASTRecordLayout(RD);
4595     S += llvm::utostr(RL.getFieldOffset(FD->getFieldIndex()));
4596     if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>())
4597       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(Ctx, ET);
4598     else
4599       S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(Ctx, T);
4600   }
4601   S += llvm::utostr(FD->getBitWidthValue(*Ctx));
4602 }
4603 
4604 // FIXME: Use SmallString for accumulating string.
4605 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T, std::string& S,
4606                                             bool ExpandPointedToStructures,
4607                                             bool ExpandStructures,
4608                                             const FieldDecl *FD,
4609                                             bool OutermostType,
4610                                             bool EncodingProperty,
4611                                             bool StructField,
4612                                             bool EncodeBlockParameters,
4613                                             bool EncodeClassNames) const {
4614   if (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4615     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
4616       return EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
4617     S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(this, T);
4618     return;
4619   }
4620 
4621   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) {
4622     S += 'j';
4623     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(CT->getElementType(), S, false, false, 0, false,
4624                                false);
4625     return;
4626   }
4627 
4628   // encoding for pointer or r3eference types.
4629   QualType PointeeTy;
4630   if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
4631     if (PT->isObjCSelType()) {
4632       S += ':';
4633       return;
4634     }
4635     PointeeTy = PT->getPointeeType();
4636   }
4637   else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
4638     PointeeTy = RT->getPointeeType();
4639   if (!PointeeTy.isNull()) {
4640     bool isReadOnly = false;
4641     // For historical/compatibility reasons, the read-only qualifier of the
4642     // pointee gets emitted _before_ the '^'.  The read-only qualifier of
4643     // the pointer itself gets ignored, _unless_ we are looking at a typedef!
4644     // Also, do not emit the 'r' for anything but the outermost type!
4645     if (isa<TypedefType>(T.getTypePtr())) {
4646       if (OutermostType && T.isConstQualified()) {
4647         isReadOnly = true;
4648         S += 'r';
4649       }
4650     } else if (OutermostType) {
4651       QualType P = PointeeTy;
4652       while (P->getAs<PointerType>())
4653         P = P->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4654       if (P.isConstQualified()) {
4655         isReadOnly = true;
4656         S += 'r';
4657       }
4658     }
4659     if (isReadOnly) {
4660       // Another legacy compatibility encoding. Some ObjC qualifier and type
4661       // combinations need to be rearranged.
4662       // Rewrite "in const" from "nr" to "rn"
4663       if (StringRef(S).endswith("nr"))
4664         S.replace(S.end()-2, S.end(), "rn");
4665     }
4666 
4667     if (PointeeTy->isCharType()) {
4668       // char pointer types should be encoded as '*' unless it is a
4669       // type that has been typedef'd to 'BOOL'.
4670       if (!isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(PointeeTy)) {
4671         S += '*';
4672         return;
4673       }
4674     } else if (const RecordType *RTy = PointeeTy->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4675       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_class *" to "#".
4676       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_class")) {
4677         S += '#';
4678         return;
4679       }
4680       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_object *" to "@".
4681       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_object")) {
4682         S += '@';
4683         return;
4684       }
4685       // fall through...
4686     }
4687     S += '^';
4688     getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(PointeeTy);
4689 
4690     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
4691                                NULL);
4692     return;
4693   }
4694 
4695   if (const ArrayType *AT =
4696       // Ignore type qualifiers etc.
4697         dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4698     if (isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT) && !StructField) {
4699       // Incomplete arrays are encoded as a pointer to the array element.
4700       S += '^';
4701 
4702       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
4703                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
4704     } else {
4705       S += '[';
4706 
4707       if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
4708         if (getTypeSize(CAT->getElementType()) == 0)
4709           S += '0';
4710         else
4711           S += llvm::utostr(CAT->getSize().getZExtValue());
4712       } else {
4713         //Variable length arrays are encoded as a regular array with 0 elements.
4714         assert((isa<VariableArrayType>(AT) || isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) &&
4715                "Unknown array type!");
4716         S += '0';
4717       }
4718 
4719       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
4720                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
4721       S += ']';
4722     }
4723     return;
4724   }
4725 
4726   if (T->getAs<FunctionType>()) {
4727     S += '?';
4728     return;
4729   }
4730 
4731   if (const RecordType *RTy = T->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4732     RecordDecl *RDecl = RTy->getDecl();
4733     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? '(' : '{';
4734     // Anonymous structures print as '?'
4735     if (const IdentifierInfo *II = RDecl->getIdentifier()) {
4736       S += II->getName();
4737       if (ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *Spec
4738           = dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RDecl)) {
4739         const TemplateArgumentList &TemplateArgs = Spec->getTemplateArgs();
4740         std::string TemplateArgsStr
4741           = TemplateSpecializationType::PrintTemplateArgumentList(
4742                                             TemplateArgs.data(),
4743                                             TemplateArgs.size(),
4744                                             (*this).getPrintingPolicy());
4745 
4746         S += TemplateArgsStr;
4747       }
4748     } else {
4749       S += '?';
4750     }
4751     if (ExpandStructures) {
4752       S += '=';
4753       if (!RDecl->isUnion()) {
4754         getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RDecl, S, FD);
4755       } else {
4756         for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
4757                                      FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
4758              Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) {
4759           if (FD) {
4760             S += '"';
4761             S += Field->getNameAsString();
4762             S += '"';
4763           }
4764 
4765           // Special case bit-fields.
4766           if (Field->isBitField()) {
4767             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true,
4768                                        *Field);
4769           } else {
4770             QualType qt = Field->getType();
4771             getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
4772             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true,
4773                                        FD, /*OutermostType*/false,
4774                                        /*EncodingProperty*/false,
4775                                        /*StructField*/true);
4776           }
4777         }
4778       }
4779     }
4780     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? ')' : '}';
4781     return;
4782   }
4783 
4784   if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>()) {
4785     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
4786       EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
4787     else
4788       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(this, ET);
4789     return;
4790   }
4791 
4792   if (const BlockPointerType *BT = T->getAs<BlockPointerType>()) {
4793     S += "@?"; // Unlike a pointer-to-function, which is "^?".
4794     if (EncodeBlockParameters) {
4795       const FunctionType *FT = BT->getPointeeType()->getAs<FunctionType>();
4796 
4797       S += '<';
4798       // Block return type
4799       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(FT->getResultType(), S,
4800                                  ExpandPointedToStructures, ExpandStructures,
4801                                  FD,
4802                                  false /* OutermostType */,
4803                                  EncodingProperty,
4804                                  false /* StructField */,
4805                                  EncodeBlockParameters,
4806                                  EncodeClassNames);
4807       // Block self
4808       S += "@?";
4809       // Block parameters
4810       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(FT)) {
4811         for (FunctionProtoType::arg_type_iterator I = FPT->arg_type_begin(),
4812                E = FPT->arg_type_end(); I && (I != E); ++I) {
4813           getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(*I, S,
4814                                      ExpandPointedToStructures,
4815                                      ExpandStructures,
4816                                      FD,
4817                                      false /* OutermostType */,
4818                                      EncodingProperty,
4819                                      false /* StructField */,
4820                                      EncodeBlockParameters,
4821                                      EncodeClassNames);
4822         }
4823       }
4824       S += '>';
4825     }
4826     return;
4827   }
4828 
4829   // Ignore protocol qualifiers when mangling at this level.
4830   if (const ObjCObjectType *OT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectType>())
4831     T = OT->getBaseType();
4832 
4833   if (const ObjCInterfaceType *OIT = T->getAs<ObjCInterfaceType>()) {
4834     // @encode(class_name)
4835     ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OIT->getDecl();
4836     S += '{';
4837     const IdentifierInfo *II = OI->getIdentifier();
4838     S += II->getName();
4839     S += '=';
4840     SmallVector<const ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars;
4841     DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars);
4842     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4843       const FieldDecl *Field = cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]);
4844       if (Field->isBitField())
4845         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, Field);
4846       else
4847         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, FD);
4848     }
4849     S += '}';
4850     return;
4851   }
4852 
4853   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *OPT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) {
4854     if (OPT->isObjCIdType()) {
4855       S += '@';
4856       return;
4857     }
4858 
4859     if (OPT->isObjCClassType() || OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType()) {
4860       // FIXME: Consider if we need to output qualifiers for 'Class<p>'.
4861       // Since this is a binary compatibility issue, need to consult with runtime
4862       // folks. Fortunately, this is a *very* obsure construct.
4863       S += '#';
4864       return;
4865     }
4866 
4867     if (OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
4868       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(getObjCIdType(), S,
4869                                  ExpandPointedToStructures,
4870                                  ExpandStructures, FD);
4871       if (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames) {
4872         // Note that we do extended encoding of protocol qualifer list
4873         // Only when doing ivar or property encoding.
4874         S += '"';
4875         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
4876              E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
4877           S += '<';
4878           S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
4879           S += '>';
4880         }
4881         S += '"';
4882       }
4883       return;
4884     }
4885 
4886     QualType PointeeTy = OPT->getPointeeType();
4887     if (!EncodingProperty &&
4888         isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
4889       // Another historical/compatibility reason.
4890       // We encode the underlying type which comes out as
4891       // {...};
4892       S += '^';
4893       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S,
4894                                  false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
4895                                  NULL);
4896       return;
4897     }
4898 
4899     S += '@';
4900     if (OPT->getInterfaceDecl() &&
4901         (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames)) {
4902       S += '"';
4903       S += OPT->getInterfaceDecl()->getIdentifier()->getName();
4904       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
4905            E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
4906         S += '<';
4907         S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
4908         S += '>';
4909       }
4910       S += '"';
4911     }
4912     return;
4913   }
4914 
4915   // gcc just blithely ignores member pointers.
4916   // TODO: maybe there should be a mangling for these
4917   if (T->getAs<MemberPointerType>())
4918     return;
4919 
4920   if (T->isVectorType()) {
4921     // This matches gcc's encoding, even though technically it is
4922     // insufficient.
4923     // FIXME. We should do a better job than gcc.
4924     return;
4925   }
4926 
4927   llvm_unreachable("@encode for type not implemented!");
4928 }
4929 
4930 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RecordDecl *RDecl,
4931                                                  std::string &S,
4932                                                  const FieldDecl *FD,
4933                                                  bool includeVBases) const {
4934   assert(RDecl && "Expected non-null RecordDecl");
4935   assert(!RDecl->isUnion() && "Should not be called for unions");
4936   if (!RDecl->getDefinition())
4937     return;
4938 
4939   CXXRecordDecl *CXXRec = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RDecl);
4940   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *> FieldOrBaseOffsets;
4941   const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RDecl);
4942 
4943   if (CXXRec) {
4944     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
4945            BI = CXXRec->bases_begin(),
4946            BE = CXXRec->bases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
4947       if (!BI->isVirtual()) {
4948         CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
4949         if (base->isEmpty())
4950           continue;
4951         uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getBaseClassOffset(base));
4952         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
4953                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
4954       }
4955     }
4956   }
4957 
4958   unsigned i = 0;
4959   for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
4960                                FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
4961        Field != FieldEnd; ++Field, ++i) {
4962     uint64_t offs = layout.getFieldOffset(i);
4963     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
4964                               std::make_pair(offs, *Field));
4965   }
4966 
4967   if (CXXRec && includeVBases) {
4968     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
4969            BI = CXXRec->vbases_begin(),
4970            BE = CXXRec->vbases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
4971       CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
4972       if (base->isEmpty())
4973         continue;
4974       uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getVBaseClassOffset(base));
4975       if (FieldOrBaseOffsets.find(offs) == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end())
4976         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(),
4977                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
4978     }
4979   }
4980 
4981   CharUnits size;
4982   if (CXXRec) {
4983     size = includeVBases ? layout.getSize() : layout.getNonVirtualSize();
4984   } else {
4985     size = layout.getSize();
4986   }
4987 
4988   uint64_t CurOffs = 0;
4989   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *>::iterator
4990     CurLayObj = FieldOrBaseOffsets.begin();
4991 
4992   if (CXXRec && CXXRec->isDynamicClass() &&
4993       (CurLayObj == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end() || CurLayObj->first != 0)) {
4994     if (FD) {
4995       S += "\"_vptr$";
4996       std::string recname = CXXRec->getNameAsString();
4997       if (recname.empty()) recname = "?";
4998       S += recname;
4999       S += '"';
5000     }
5001     S += "^^?";
5002     CurOffs += getTypeSize(VoidPtrTy);
5003   }
5004 
5005   if (!RDecl->hasFlexibleArrayMember()) {
5006     // Mark the end of the structure.
5007     uint64_t offs = toBits(size);
5008     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5009                               std::make_pair(offs, (NamedDecl*)0));
5010   }
5011 
5012   for (; CurLayObj != FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(); ++CurLayObj) {
5013     assert(CurOffs <= CurLayObj->first);
5014 
5015     if (CurOffs < CurLayObj->first) {
5016       uint64_t padding = CurLayObj->first - CurOffs;
5017       // FIXME: There doesn't seem to be a way to indicate in the encoding that
5018       // packing/alignment of members is different that normal, in which case
5019       // the encoding will be out-of-sync with the real layout.
5020       // If the runtime switches to just consider the size of types without
5021       // taking into account alignment, we could make padding explicit in the
5022       // encoding (e.g. using arrays of chars). The encoding strings would be
5023       // longer then though.
5024       CurOffs += padding;
5025     }
5026 
5027     NamedDecl *dcl = CurLayObj->second;
5028     if (dcl == 0)
5029       break; // reached end of structure.
5030 
5031     if (CXXRecordDecl *base = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(dcl)) {
5032       // We expand the bases without their virtual bases since those are going
5033       // in the initial structure. Note that this differs from gcc which
5034       // expands virtual bases each time one is encountered in the hierarchy,
5035       // making the encoding type bigger than it really is.
5036       getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(base, S, FD, /*includeVBases*/false);
5037       assert(!base->isEmpty());
5038       CurOffs += toBits(getASTRecordLayout(base).getNonVirtualSize());
5039     } else {
5040       FieldDecl *field = cast<FieldDecl>(dcl);
5041       if (FD) {
5042         S += '"';
5043         S += field->getNameAsString();
5044         S += '"';
5045       }
5046 
5047       if (field->isBitField()) {
5048         EncodeBitField(this, S, field->getType(), field);
5049         CurOffs += field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
5050       } else {
5051         QualType qt = field->getType();
5052         getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
5053         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, FD,
5054                                    /*OutermostType*/false,
5055                                    /*EncodingProperty*/false,
5056                                    /*StructField*/true);
5057         CurOffs += getTypeSize(field->getType());
5058       }
5059     }
5060   }
5061 }
5062 
5063 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
5064                                                  std::string& S) const {
5065   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_In)
5066     S += 'n';
5067   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Inout)
5068     S += 'N';
5069   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Out)
5070     S += 'o';
5071   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Bycopy)
5072     S += 'O';
5073   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Byref)
5074     S += 'R';
5075   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Oneway)
5076     S += 'V';
5077 }
5078 
5079 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCIdDecl() const {
5080   if (!ObjCIdDecl) {
5081     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, 0, 0);
5082     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5083     TypeSourceInfo *IdInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5084     ObjCIdDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5085                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5086                                      SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5087                                      &Idents.get("id"), IdInfo);
5088   }
5089 
5090   return ObjCIdDecl;
5091 }
5092 
5093 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCSelDecl() const {
5094   if (!ObjCSelDecl) {
5095     QualType SelT = getPointerType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy);
5096     TypeSourceInfo *SelInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(SelT);
5097     ObjCSelDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5098                                       getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5099                                       SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5100                                       &Idents.get("SEL"), SelInfo);
5101   }
5102   return ObjCSelDecl;
5103 }
5104 
5105 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCClassDecl() const {
5106   if (!ObjCClassDecl) {
5107     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, 0, 0);
5108     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5109     TypeSourceInfo *ClassInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5110     ObjCClassDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5111                                         getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5112                                         SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5113                                         &Idents.get("Class"), ClassInfo);
5114   }
5115 
5116   return ObjCClassDecl;
5117 }
5118 
5119 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjCProtocolDecl() const {
5120   if (!ObjCProtocolClassDecl) {
5121     ObjCProtocolClassDecl
5122       = ObjCInterfaceDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5123                                   SourceLocation(),
5124                                   &Idents.get("Protocol"),
5125                                   /*PrevDecl=*/0,
5126                                   SourceLocation(), true);
5127   }
5128 
5129   return ObjCProtocolClassDecl;
5130 }
5131 
5132 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5133 // __builtin_va_list Construction Functions
5134 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5135 
5136 static TypedefDecl *CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5137   // typedef char* __builtin_va_list;
5138   QualType CharPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->CharTy);
5139   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5140     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(CharPtrType);
5141 
5142   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5143     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5144                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5145                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5146                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5147                           TInfo);
5148   return VaListTypeDecl;
5149 }
5150 
5151 static TypedefDecl *CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5152   // typedef void* __builtin_va_list;
5153   QualType VoidPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5154   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5155     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VoidPtrType);
5156 
5157   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5158     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5159                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5160                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5161                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5162                           TInfo);
5163   return VaListTypeDecl;
5164 }
5165 
5166 static TypedefDecl *CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5167   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5168   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5169 
5170   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5171                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5172                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5173   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5174 
5175   const size_t NumFields = 5;
5176   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5177   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5178 
5179   //   unsigned char gpr;
5180   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5181   FieldNames[0] = "gpr";
5182 
5183   //   unsigned char fpr;
5184   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5185   FieldNames[1] = "fpr";
5186 
5187   //   unsigned short reserved;
5188   FieldTypes[2] = Context->UnsignedShortTy;
5189   FieldNames[2] = "reserved";
5190 
5191   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5192   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5193   FieldNames[3] = "overflow_arg_area";
5194 
5195   //   void* reg_save_area;
5196   FieldTypes[4] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5197   FieldNames[4] = "reg_save_area";
5198 
5199   // Create fields
5200   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5201     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*Context, VaListTagDecl,
5202                                          SourceLocation(),
5203                                          SourceLocation(),
5204                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5205                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5206                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5207                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5208                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5209     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5210     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5211   }
5212   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5213   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5214   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5215 
5216   // } __va_list_tag;
5217   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5218     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5219                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5220                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5221                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5222                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5223   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5224     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5225 
5226   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5227   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5228   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5229     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5230                                     Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5231   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5232     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5233   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5234     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5235                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5236                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5237                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5238                           TInfo);
5239 
5240   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5241 }
5242 
5243 static TypedefDecl *
5244 CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5245   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5246   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5247   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5248                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5249                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5250   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5251 
5252   const size_t NumFields = 4;
5253   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5254   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5255 
5256   //   unsigned gp_offset;
5257   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5258   FieldNames[0] = "gp_offset";
5259 
5260   //   unsigned fp_offset;
5261   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5262   FieldNames[1] = "fp_offset";
5263 
5264   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5265   FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5266   FieldNames[2] = "overflow_arg_area";
5267 
5268   //   void* reg_save_area;
5269   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5270   FieldNames[3] = "reg_save_area";
5271 
5272   // Create fields
5273   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5274     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5275                                          VaListTagDecl,
5276                                          SourceLocation(),
5277                                          SourceLocation(),
5278                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5279                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5280                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5281                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5282                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5283     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5284     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5285   }
5286   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5287   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5288   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5289 
5290   // } __va_list_tag;
5291   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5292     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5293                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5294                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5295                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5296                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5297   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5298     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5299 
5300   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5301   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5302   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5303     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5304                                       Size, ArrayType::Normal,0);
5305   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5306     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5307   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5308     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5309                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5310                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5311                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5312                           TInfo);
5313 
5314   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5315 }
5316 
5317 static TypedefDecl *CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5318   // typedef int __builtin_va_list[4];
5319   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 4);
5320   QualType IntArrayType
5321     = Context->getConstantArrayType(Context->IntTy,
5322 				    Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5323   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5324     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5325                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5326                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5327                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5328                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(IntArrayType));
5329 
5330   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5331 }
5332 
5333 static TypedefDecl *CreateVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context,
5334                                      TargetInfo::BuiltinVaListKind Kind) {
5335   switch (Kind) {
5336   case TargetInfo::CharPtrBuiltinVaList:
5337     return CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5338   case TargetInfo::VoidPtrBuiltinVaList:
5339     return CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5340   case TargetInfo::PowerABIBuiltinVaList:
5341     return CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5342   case TargetInfo::X86_64ABIBuiltinVaList:
5343     return CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5344   case TargetInfo::PNaClABIBuiltinVaList:
5345     return CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5346   }
5347 
5348   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled __builtin_va_list type kind");
5349 }
5350 
5351 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getBuiltinVaListDecl() const {
5352   if (!BuiltinVaListDecl)
5353     BuiltinVaListDecl = CreateVaListDecl(this, Target->getBuiltinVaListKind());
5354 
5355   return BuiltinVaListDecl;
5356 }
5357 
5358 QualType ASTContext::getVaListTagType() const {
5359   // Force the creation of VaListTagTy by building the __builtin_va_list
5360   // declaration.
5361   if (VaListTagTy.isNull())
5362     (void) getBuiltinVaListDecl();
5363 
5364   return VaListTagTy;
5365 }
5366 
5367 void ASTContext::setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) {
5368   assert(ObjCConstantStringType.isNull() &&
5369          "'NSConstantString' type already set!");
5370 
5371   ObjCConstantStringType = getObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
5372 }
5373 
5374 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that corresponds to a non-empty
5375 /// lookup.
5376 TemplateName
5377 ASTContext::getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin,
5378                                       UnresolvedSetIterator End) const {
5379   unsigned size = End - Begin;
5380   assert(size > 1 && "set is not overloaded!");
5381 
5382   void *memory = Allocate(sizeof(OverloadedTemplateStorage) +
5383                           size * sizeof(FunctionTemplateDecl*));
5384   OverloadedTemplateStorage *OT = new(memory) OverloadedTemplateStorage(size);
5385 
5386   NamedDecl **Storage = OT->getStorage();
5387   for (UnresolvedSetIterator I = Begin; I != End; ++I) {
5388     NamedDecl *D = *I;
5389     assert(isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D) ||
5390            (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D) &&
5391             isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D->getUnderlyingDecl())));
5392     *Storage++ = D;
5393   }
5394 
5395   return TemplateName(OT);
5396 }
5397 
5398 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a qualified
5399 /// template name such as \c std::vector.
5400 TemplateName
5401 ASTContext::getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5402                                      bool TemplateKeyword,
5403                                      TemplateDecl *Template) const {
5404   assert(NNS && "Missing nested-name-specifier in qualified template name");
5405 
5406   // FIXME: Canonicalization?
5407   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5408   QualifiedTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5409 
5410   void *InsertPos = 0;
5411   QualifiedTemplateName *QTN =
5412     QualifiedTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5413   if (!QTN) {
5414     QTN = new (*this,4) QualifiedTemplateName(NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5415     QualifiedTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5416   }
5417 
5418   return TemplateName(QTN);
5419 }
5420 
5421 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5422 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template apply.
5423 TemplateName
5424 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5425                                      const IdentifierInfo *Name) const {
5426   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5427          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5428 
5429   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5430   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Name);
5431 
5432   void *InsertPos = 0;
5433   DependentTemplateName *QTN =
5434     DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5435 
5436   if (QTN)
5437     return TemplateName(QTN);
5438 
5439   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5440   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5441     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name);
5442   } else {
5443     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Name);
5444     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name, Canon);
5445     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN =
5446       DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5447     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent type name canonicalization broken");
5448     (void)CheckQTN;
5449   }
5450 
5451   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5452   return TemplateName(QTN);
5453 }
5454 
5455 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5456 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template operator+.
5457 TemplateName
5458 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5459                                      OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const {
5460   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5461          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5462 
5463   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5464   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Operator);
5465 
5466   void *InsertPos = 0;
5467   DependentTemplateName *QTN
5468     = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5469 
5470   if (QTN)
5471     return TemplateName(QTN);
5472 
5473   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5474   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5475     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator);
5476   } else {
5477     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Operator);
5478     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator, Canon);
5479 
5480     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN
5481       = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5482     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent template name canonicalization broken");
5483     (void)CheckQTN;
5484   }
5485 
5486   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5487   return TemplateName(QTN);
5488 }
5489 
5490 TemplateName
5491 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParm(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *param,
5492                                          TemplateName replacement) const {
5493   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5494   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage::Profile(ID, param, replacement);
5495 
5496   void *insertPos = 0;
5497   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
5498     = SubstTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
5499 
5500   if (!subst) {
5501     subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage(param, replacement);
5502     SubstTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(subst, insertPos);
5503   }
5504 
5505   return TemplateName(subst);
5506 }
5507 
5508 TemplateName
5509 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Param,
5510                                        const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) const {
5511   ASTContext &Self = const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this);
5512   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5513   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage::Profile(ID, Self, Param, ArgPack);
5514 
5515   void *InsertPos = 0;
5516   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *Subst
5517     = SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5518 
5519   if (!Subst) {
5520     Subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage(Param,
5521                                                            ArgPack.pack_size(),
5522                                                          ArgPack.pack_begin());
5523     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.InsertNode(Subst, InsertPos);
5524   }
5525 
5526   return TemplateName(Subst);
5527 }
5528 
5529 /// getFromTargetType - Given one of the integer types provided by
5530 /// TargetInfo, produce the corresponding type. The unsigned @p Type
5531 /// is actually a value of type @c TargetInfo::IntType.
5532 CanQualType ASTContext::getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const {
5533   switch (Type) {
5534   case TargetInfo::NoInt: return CanQualType();
5535   case TargetInfo::SignedShort: return ShortTy;
5536   case TargetInfo::UnsignedShort: return UnsignedShortTy;
5537   case TargetInfo::SignedInt: return IntTy;
5538   case TargetInfo::UnsignedInt: return UnsignedIntTy;
5539   case TargetInfo::SignedLong: return LongTy;
5540   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLong: return UnsignedLongTy;
5541   case TargetInfo::SignedLongLong: return LongLongTy;
5542   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLongLong: return UnsignedLongLongTy;
5543   }
5544 
5545   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled TargetInfo::IntType value");
5546 }
5547 
5548 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5549 //                        Type Predicates.
5550 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5551 
5552 /// getObjCGCAttr - Returns one of GCNone, Weak or Strong objc's
5553 /// garbage collection attribute.
5554 ///
5555 Qualifiers::GC ASTContext::getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const {
5556   if (getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC)
5557     return Qualifiers::GCNone;
5558 
5559   assert(getLangOpts().ObjC1);
5560   Qualifiers::GC GCAttrs = Ty.getObjCGCAttr();
5561 
5562   // Default behaviour under objective-C's gc is for ObjC pointers
5563   // (or pointers to them) be treated as though they were declared
5564   // as __strong.
5565   if (GCAttrs == Qualifiers::GCNone) {
5566     if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType())
5567       return Qualifiers::Strong;
5568     else if (Ty->isPointerType())
5569       return getObjCGCAttrKind(Ty->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType());
5570   } else {
5571     // It's not valid to set GC attributes on anything that isn't a
5572     // pointer.
5573 #ifndef NDEBUG
5574     QualType CT = Ty->getCanonicalTypeInternal();
5575     while (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(CT))
5576       CT = AT->getElementType();
5577     assert(CT->isAnyPointerType() || CT->isBlockPointerType());
5578 #endif
5579   }
5580   return GCAttrs;
5581 }
5582 
5583 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5584 //                        Type Compatibility Testing
5585 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5586 
5587 /// areCompatVectorTypes - Return true if the two specified vector types are
5588 /// compatible.
5589 static bool areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType *LHS,
5590                                  const VectorType *RHS) {
5591   assert(LHS->isCanonicalUnqualified() && RHS->isCanonicalUnqualified());
5592   return LHS->getElementType() == RHS->getElementType() &&
5593          LHS->getNumElements() == RHS->getNumElements();
5594 }
5595 
5596 bool ASTContext::areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec,
5597                                           QualType SecondVec) {
5598   assert(FirstVec->isVectorType() && "FirstVec should be a vector type");
5599   assert(SecondVec->isVectorType() && "SecondVec should be a vector type");
5600 
5601   if (hasSameUnqualifiedType(FirstVec, SecondVec))
5602     return true;
5603 
5604   // Treat Neon vector types and most AltiVec vector types as if they are the
5605   // equivalent GCC vector types.
5606   const VectorType *First = FirstVec->getAs<VectorType>();
5607   const VectorType *Second = SecondVec->getAs<VectorType>();
5608   if (First->getNumElements() == Second->getNumElements() &&
5609       hasSameType(First->getElementType(), Second->getElementType()) &&
5610       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
5611       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool &&
5612       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
5613       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool)
5614     return true;
5615 
5616   return false;
5617 }
5618 
5619 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5620 // ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - Compatibility testing for qualified id's.
5621 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5622 
5623 /// ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol - return 'true' if 'lProto' is in the
5624 /// inheritance hierarchy of 'rProto'.
5625 bool
5626 ASTContext::ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl *lProto,
5627                                            ObjCProtocolDecl *rProto) const {
5628   if (declaresSameEntity(lProto, rProto))
5629     return true;
5630   for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator PI = rProto->protocol_begin(),
5631        E = rProto->protocol_end(); PI != E; ++PI)
5632     if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lProto, *PI))
5633       return true;
5634   return false;
5635 }
5636 
5637 /// QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId - compare id<p,...> with id<p1,...>
5638 /// return true if lhs's protocols conform to rhs's protocol; false
5639 /// otherwise.
5640 bool ASTContext::QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId(QualType lhs, QualType rhs) {
5641   if (lhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType() && rhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
5642     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lhs, rhs, false);
5643   return false;
5644 }
5645 
5646 /// ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible - compare  Class<p,...> and
5647 /// Class<p1, ...>.
5648 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,
5649                                                       QualType rhs) {
5650   const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5651   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5652   assert ((lhsQID && rhsOPT) && "ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible");
5653 
5654   for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5655        E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5656     bool match = false;
5657     ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5658     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5659          E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5660       ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5661       if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto)) {
5662         match = true;
5663         break;
5664       }
5665     }
5666     if (!match)
5667       return false;
5668   }
5669   return true;
5670 }
5671 
5672 /// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - We know that one of lhs/rhs is an
5673 /// ObjCQualifiedIDType.
5674 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
5675                                                    bool compare) {
5676   // Allow id<P..> and an 'id' or void* type in all cases.
5677   if (lhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
5678       lhs->isObjCIdType() || lhs->isObjCClassType())
5679     return true;
5680   else if (rhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
5681            rhs->isObjCIdType() || rhs->isObjCClassType())
5682     return true;
5683 
5684   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
5685     const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5686 
5687     if (!rhsOPT) return false;
5688 
5689     if (rhsOPT->qual_empty()) {
5690       // If the RHS is a unqualified interface pointer "NSString*",
5691       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
5692       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5693         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5694              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5695           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5696           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5697           // through its super class and categories.
5698           if (!rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true))
5699             return false;
5700         }
5701       }
5702       // If there are no qualifiers and no interface, we have an 'id'.
5703       return true;
5704     }
5705     // Both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
5706     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5707          E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5708       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5709       bool match = false;
5710 
5711       // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5712       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5713       // through its super class and categories.
5714       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5715            E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5716         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5717         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5718             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5719           match = true;
5720           break;
5721         }
5722       }
5723       // If the RHS is a qualified interface pointer "NSString<P>*",
5724       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
5725       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5726         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5727              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5728           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5729           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5730           // through its super class and categories.
5731           if (rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) {
5732             match = true;
5733             break;
5734           }
5735         }
5736       }
5737       if (!match)
5738         return false;
5739     }
5740 
5741     return true;
5742   }
5743 
5744   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsQID = rhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType();
5745   assert(rhsQID && "One of the LHS/RHS should be id<x>");
5746 
5747   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsOPT =
5748         lhs->getAsObjCInterfacePointerType()) {
5749     // If both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
5750     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5751          E = lhsOPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5752       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5753       bool match = false;
5754 
5755       // when comparing an id<P> on rhs with a static type on lhs,
5756       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5757       // through its super class and categories.
5758       // First, lhs protocols in the qualifier list must be found, direct
5759       // or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
5760       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
5761            E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5762         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5763         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5764             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5765           match = true;
5766           break;
5767         }
5768       }
5769       if (!match)
5770         return false;
5771     }
5772 
5773     // Static class's protocols, or its super class or category protocols
5774     // must be found, direct or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
5775     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *lhsID = lhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5776       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
5777       CollectInheritedProtocols(lhsID, LHSInheritedProtocols);
5778       // This is rather dubious but matches gcc's behavior. If lhs has
5779       // no type qualifier and its class has no static protocol(s)
5780       // assume that it is mismatch.
5781       if (LHSInheritedProtocols.empty() && lhsOPT->qual_empty())
5782         return false;
5783       for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
5784            LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
5785            E = LHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
5786         bool match = false;
5787         ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = (*I);
5788         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
5789              E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5790           ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5791           if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5792               (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5793             match = true;
5794             break;
5795           }
5796         }
5797         if (!match)
5798           return false;
5799       }
5800     }
5801     return true;
5802   }
5803   return false;
5804 }
5805 
5806 /// canAssignObjCInterfaces - Return true if the two interface types are
5807 /// compatible for assignment from RHS to LHS.  This handles validation of any
5808 /// protocol qualifiers on the LHS or RHS.
5809 ///
5810 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
5811                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) {
5812   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
5813   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
5814 
5815   // If either type represents the built-in 'id' or 'Class' types, return true.
5816   if (LHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() ||
5817       RHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass())
5818     return true;
5819 
5820   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedId() || RHS->isObjCQualifiedId())
5821     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5822                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
5823                                              false);
5824 
5825   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedClass() && RHS->isObjCQualifiedClass())
5826     return ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5827                                                 QualType(RHSOPT,0));
5828 
5829   // If we have 2 user-defined types, fall into that path.
5830   if (LHS->getInterface() && RHS->getInterface())
5831     return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS);
5832 
5833   return false;
5834 }
5835 
5836 /// canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer - This routine is specifically written
5837 /// for providing type-safety for objective-c pointers used to pass/return
5838 /// arguments in block literals. When passed as arguments, passing 'A*' where
5839 /// 'id' is expected is not OK. Passing 'Sub *" where 'Super *" is expected is
5840 /// not OK. For the return type, the opposite is not OK.
5841 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
5842                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
5843                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
5844                                          bool BlockReturnType) {
5845   if (RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || LHSOPT->isObjCIdType())
5846     return true;
5847 
5848   if (LHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType()) {
5849     return RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType();
5850   }
5851 
5852   if (LHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
5853     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5854                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
5855                                              false);
5856 
5857   const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = LHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
5858   const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = RHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
5859   if (LHS && RHS)  { // We have 2 user-defined types.
5860     if (LHS != RHS) {
5861       if (LHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getDecl()))
5862         return BlockReturnType;
5863       if (RHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(LHS->getDecl()))
5864         return !BlockReturnType;
5865     }
5866     else
5867       return true;
5868   }
5869   return false;
5870 }
5871 
5872 /// getIntersectionOfProtocols - This routine finds the intersection of set
5873 /// of protocols inherited from two distinct objective-c pointer objects.
5874 /// It is used to build composite qualifier list of the composite type of
5875 /// the conditional expression involving two objective-c pointer objects.
5876 static
5877 void getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext &Context,
5878                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
5879                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
5880       SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl *> &IntersectionOfProtocols) {
5881 
5882   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
5883   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
5884   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS must have an interface base");
5885   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS must have an interface base");
5886 
5887   llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> InheritedProtocolSet;
5888   unsigned LHSNumProtocols = LHS->getNumProtocols();
5889   if (LHSNumProtocols > 0)
5890     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHS->qual_begin(), LHS->qual_end());
5891   else {
5892     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
5893     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(LHS->getInterface(),
5894                                       LHSInheritedProtocols);
5895     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
5896                                 LHSInheritedProtocols.end());
5897   }
5898 
5899   unsigned RHSNumProtocols = RHS->getNumProtocols();
5900   if (RHSNumProtocols > 0) {
5901     ObjCProtocolDecl **RHSProtocols =
5902       const_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl **>(RHS->qual_begin());
5903     for (unsigned i = 0; i < RHSNumProtocols; ++i)
5904       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count(RHSProtocols[i]))
5905         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back(RHSProtocols[i]);
5906   } else {
5907     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> RHSInheritedProtocols;
5908     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(),
5909                                       RHSInheritedProtocols);
5910     for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
5911          RHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
5912          E = RHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I)
5913       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count((*I)))
5914         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back((*I));
5915   }
5916 }
5917 
5918 /// areCommonBaseCompatible - Returns common base class of the two classes if
5919 /// one found. Note that this is O'2 algorithm. But it will be called as the
5920 /// last type comparison in a ?-exp of ObjC pointer types before a
5921 /// warning is issued. So, its invokation is extremely rare.
5922 QualType ASTContext::areCommonBaseCompatible(
5923                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Lptr,
5924                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Rptr) {
5925   const ObjCObjectType *LHS = Lptr->getObjectType();
5926   const ObjCObjectType *RHS = Rptr->getObjectType();
5927   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* LDecl = LHS->getInterface();
5928   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* RDecl = RHS->getInterface();
5929   if (!LDecl || !RDecl || (declaresSameEntity(LDecl, RDecl)))
5930     return QualType();
5931 
5932   do {
5933     LHS = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(getObjCInterfaceType(LDecl));
5934     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS)) {
5935       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> Protocols;
5936       getIntersectionOfProtocols(*this, Lptr, Rptr, Protocols);
5937 
5938       QualType Result = QualType(LHS, 0);
5939       if (!Protocols.empty())
5940         Result = getObjCObjectType(Result, Protocols.data(), Protocols.size());
5941       Result = getObjCObjectPointerType(Result);
5942       return Result;
5943     }
5944   } while ((LDecl = LDecl->getSuperClass()));
5945 
5946   return QualType();
5947 }
5948 
5949 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType *LHS,
5950                                          const ObjCObjectType *RHS) {
5951   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS is not an interface type");
5952   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS is not an interface type");
5953 
5954   // Verify that the base decls are compatible: the RHS must be a subclass of
5955   // the LHS.
5956   if (!LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface()))
5957     return false;
5958 
5959   // RHS must have a superset of the protocols in the LHS.  If the LHS is not
5960   // protocol qualified at all, then we are good.
5961   if (LHS->getNumProtocols() == 0)
5962     return true;
5963 
5964   // Okay, we know the LHS has protocol qualifiers.  If the RHS doesn't,
5965   // more detailed analysis is required.
5966   if (RHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) {
5967     // OK, if LHS is a superclass of RHS *and*
5968     // this superclass is assignment compatible with LHS.
5969     // false otherwise.
5970     bool IsSuperClass =
5971       LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface());
5972     if (IsSuperClass) {
5973       // OK if conversion of LHS to SuperClass results in narrowing of types
5974       // ; i.e., SuperClass may implement at least one of the protocols
5975       // in LHS's protocol list. Example, SuperObj<P1> = lhs<P1,P2> is ok.
5976       // But not SuperObj<P1,P2,P3> = lhs<P1,P2>.
5977       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> SuperClassInheritedProtocols;
5978       CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), SuperClassInheritedProtocols);
5979       // If super class has no protocols, it is not a match.
5980       if (SuperClassInheritedProtocols.empty())
5981         return false;
5982 
5983       for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
5984            LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
5985            LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
5986         bool SuperImplementsProtocol = false;
5987         ObjCProtocolDecl *LHSProto = (*LHSPI);
5988 
5989         for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
5990              SuperClassInheritedProtocols.begin(),
5991              E = SuperClassInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
5992           ObjCProtocolDecl *SuperClassProto = (*I);
5993           if (SuperClassProto->lookupProtocolNamed(LHSProto->getIdentifier())) {
5994             SuperImplementsProtocol = true;
5995             break;
5996           }
5997         }
5998         if (!SuperImplementsProtocol)
5999           return false;
6000       }
6001       return true;
6002     }
6003     return false;
6004   }
6005 
6006   for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6007                                      LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6008        LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6009     bool RHSImplementsProtocol = false;
6010 
6011     // If the RHS doesn't implement the protocol on the left, the types
6012     // are incompatible.
6013     for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator RHSPI = RHS->qual_begin(),
6014                                        RHSPE = RHS->qual_end();
6015          RHSPI != RHSPE; RHSPI++) {
6016       if ((*RHSPI)->lookupProtocolNamed((*LHSPI)->getIdentifier())) {
6017         RHSImplementsProtocol = true;
6018         break;
6019       }
6020     }
6021     // FIXME: For better diagnostics, consider passing back the protocol name.
6022     if (!RHSImplementsProtocol)
6023       return false;
6024   }
6025   // The RHS implements all protocols listed on the LHS.
6026   return true;
6027 }
6028 
6029 bool ASTContext::areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6030   // get the "pointed to" types
6031   const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6032   const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6033 
6034   if (!LHSOPT || !RHSOPT)
6035     return false;
6036 
6037   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSOPT, RHSOPT) ||
6038          canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSOPT, LHSOPT);
6039 }
6040 
6041 bool ASTContext::canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To, QualType From) {
6042   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(
6043                 getObjCObjectPointerType(To)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6044                 getObjCObjectPointerType(From)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>());
6045 }
6046 
6047 /// typesAreCompatible - C99 6.7.3p9: For two qualified types to be compatible,
6048 /// both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type.
6049 /// C99 6.2.7p1: Two types have compatible types if their types are the
6050 /// same. See 6.7.[2,3,5] for additional rules.
6051 bool ASTContext::typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6052                                     bool CompareUnqualified) {
6053   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
6054     return hasSameType(LHS, RHS);
6055 
6056   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, false, CompareUnqualified).isNull();
6057 }
6058 
6059 bool ASTContext::propertyTypesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6060   return typesAreCompatible(LHS, RHS);
6061 }
6062 
6063 bool ASTContext::typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6064   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true).isNull();
6065 }
6066 
6067 /// mergeTransparentUnionType - if T is a transparent union type and a member
6068 /// of T is compatible with SubType, return the merged type, else return
6069 /// QualType()
6070 QualType ASTContext::mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T, QualType SubType,
6071                                                bool OfBlockPointer,
6072                                                bool Unqualified) {
6073   if (const RecordType *UT = T->getAsUnionType()) {
6074     RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl();
6075     if (UD->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) {
6076       for (RecordDecl::field_iterator it = UD->field_begin(),
6077            itend = UD->field_end(); it != itend; ++it) {
6078         QualType ET = it->getType().getUnqualifiedType();
6079         QualType MT = mergeTypes(ET, SubType, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6080         if (!MT.isNull())
6081           return MT;
6082       }
6083     }
6084   }
6085 
6086   return QualType();
6087 }
6088 
6089 /// mergeFunctionArgumentTypes - merge two types which appear as function
6090 /// argument types
6091 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6092                                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6093                                                 bool Unqualified) {
6094   // GNU extension: two types are compatible if they appear as a function
6095   // argument, one of the types is a transparent union type and the other
6096   // type is compatible with a union member
6097   QualType lmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer,
6098                                               Unqualified);
6099   if (!lmerge.isNull())
6100     return lmerge;
6101 
6102   QualType rmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(rhs, lhs, OfBlockPointer,
6103                                               Unqualified);
6104   if (!rmerge.isNull())
6105     return rmerge;
6106 
6107   return mergeTypes(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6108 }
6109 
6110 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6111                                         bool OfBlockPointer,
6112                                         bool Unqualified) {
6113   const FunctionType *lbase = lhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6114   const FunctionType *rbase = rhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6115   const FunctionProtoType *lproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(lbase);
6116   const FunctionProtoType *rproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(rbase);
6117   bool allLTypes = true;
6118   bool allRTypes = true;
6119 
6120   // Check return type
6121   QualType retType;
6122   if (OfBlockPointer) {
6123     QualType RHS = rbase->getResultType();
6124     QualType LHS = lbase->getResultType();
6125     bool UnqualifiedResult = Unqualified;
6126     if (!UnqualifiedResult)
6127       UnqualifiedResult = (!RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers());
6128     retType = mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true, UnqualifiedResult, true);
6129   }
6130   else
6131     retType = mergeTypes(lbase->getResultType(), rbase->getResultType(), false,
6132                          Unqualified);
6133   if (retType.isNull()) return QualType();
6134 
6135   if (Unqualified)
6136     retType = retType.getUnqualifiedType();
6137 
6138   CanQualType LRetType = getCanonicalType(lbase->getResultType());
6139   CanQualType RRetType = getCanonicalType(rbase->getResultType());
6140   if (Unqualified) {
6141     LRetType = LRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6142     RRetType = RRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6143   }
6144 
6145   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != LRetType)
6146     allLTypes = false;
6147   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != RRetType)
6148     allRTypes = false;
6149 
6150   // FIXME: double check this
6151   // FIXME: should we error if lbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6152   //                           rbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6153   //                           lbase->getRegParmAttr() != rbase->getRegParmAttr()?
6154   FunctionType::ExtInfo lbaseInfo = lbase->getExtInfo();
6155   FunctionType::ExtInfo rbaseInfo = rbase->getExtInfo();
6156 
6157   // Compatible functions must have compatible calling conventions
6158   if (!isSameCallConv(lbaseInfo.getCC(), rbaseInfo.getCC()))
6159     return QualType();
6160 
6161   // Regparm is part of the calling convention.
6162   if (lbaseInfo.getHasRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getHasRegParm())
6163     return QualType();
6164   if (lbaseInfo.getRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getRegParm())
6165     return QualType();
6166 
6167   if (lbaseInfo.getProducesResult() != rbaseInfo.getProducesResult())
6168     return QualType();
6169 
6170   // functypes which return are preferred over those that do not.
6171   if (lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() && !rbaseInfo.getNoReturn())
6172     allLTypes = false;
6173   else if (!lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() && rbaseInfo.getNoReturn())
6174     allRTypes = false;
6175   // FIXME: some uses, e.g. conditional exprs, really want this to be 'both'.
6176   bool NoReturn = lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() || rbaseInfo.getNoReturn();
6177 
6178   FunctionType::ExtInfo einfo = lbaseInfo.withNoReturn(NoReturn);
6179 
6180   if (lproto && rproto) { // two C99 style function prototypes
6181     assert(!lproto->hasExceptionSpec() && !rproto->hasExceptionSpec() &&
6182            "C++ shouldn't be here");
6183     unsigned lproto_nargs = lproto->getNumArgs();
6184     unsigned rproto_nargs = rproto->getNumArgs();
6185 
6186     // Compatible functions must have the same number of arguments
6187     if (lproto_nargs != rproto_nargs)
6188       return QualType();
6189 
6190     // Variadic and non-variadic functions aren't compatible
6191     if (lproto->isVariadic() != rproto->isVariadic())
6192       return QualType();
6193 
6194     if (lproto->getTypeQuals() != rproto->getTypeQuals())
6195       return QualType();
6196 
6197     if (LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount &&
6198         !FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(rproto, lproto))
6199       return QualType();
6200 
6201     // Check argument compatibility
6202     SmallVector<QualType, 10> types;
6203     for (unsigned i = 0; i < lproto_nargs; i++) {
6204       QualType largtype = lproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6205       QualType rargtype = rproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6206       QualType argtype = mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(largtype, rargtype,
6207                                                     OfBlockPointer,
6208                                                     Unqualified);
6209       if (argtype.isNull()) return QualType();
6210 
6211       if (Unqualified)
6212         argtype = argtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6213 
6214       types.push_back(argtype);
6215       if (Unqualified) {
6216         largtype = largtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6217         rargtype = rargtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6218       }
6219 
6220       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(largtype))
6221         allLTypes = false;
6222       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(rargtype))
6223         allRTypes = false;
6224     }
6225 
6226     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6227     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6228 
6229     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = lproto->getExtProtoInfo();
6230     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6231     return getFunctionType(retType, types.begin(), types.size(), EPI);
6232   }
6233 
6234   if (lproto) allRTypes = false;
6235   if (rproto) allLTypes = false;
6236 
6237   const FunctionProtoType *proto = lproto ? lproto : rproto;
6238   if (proto) {
6239     assert(!proto->hasExceptionSpec() && "C++ shouldn't be here");
6240     if (proto->isVariadic()) return QualType();
6241     // Check that the types are compatible with the types that
6242     // would result from default argument promotions (C99 6.7.5.3p15).
6243     // The only types actually affected are promotable integer
6244     // types and floats, which would be passed as a different
6245     // type depending on whether the prototype is visible.
6246     unsigned proto_nargs = proto->getNumArgs();
6247     for (unsigned i = 0; i < proto_nargs; ++i) {
6248       QualType argTy = proto->getArgType(i);
6249 
6250       // Look at the promotion type of enum types, since that is the type used
6251       // to pass enum values.
6252       if (const EnumType *Enum = argTy->getAs<EnumType>())
6253         argTy = Enum->getDecl()->getPromotionType();
6254 
6255       if (argTy->isPromotableIntegerType() ||
6256           getCanonicalType(argTy).getUnqualifiedType() == FloatTy)
6257         return QualType();
6258     }
6259 
6260     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6261     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6262 
6263     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = proto->getExtProtoInfo();
6264     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6265     return getFunctionType(retType, proto->arg_type_begin(),
6266                            proto->getNumArgs(), EPI);
6267   }
6268 
6269   if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6270   if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6271   return getFunctionNoProtoType(retType, einfo);
6272 }
6273 
6274 QualType ASTContext::mergeTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6275                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6276                                 bool Unqualified, bool BlockReturnType) {
6277   // C++ [expr]: If an expression initially has the type "reference to T", the
6278   // type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further analysis, the expression
6279   // designates the object or function denoted by the reference, and the
6280   // expression is an lvalue unless the reference is an rvalue reference and
6281   // the expression is a function call (possibly inside parentheses).
6282   assert(!LHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "LHS is a reference type?");
6283   assert(!RHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "RHS is a reference type?");
6284 
6285   if (Unqualified) {
6286     LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6287     RHS = RHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6288   }
6289 
6290   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6291            RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6292 
6293   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6294   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6295     return LHS;
6296 
6297   // If the qualifiers are different, the types aren't compatible... mostly.
6298   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6299   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6300   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6301     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type
6302     // mismatch.
6303     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6304         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace() ||
6305         LQuals.getObjCLifetime() != RQuals.getObjCLifetime())
6306       return QualType();
6307 
6308     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6309     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6310     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6311     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6312     // qualified __strong.
6313     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6314     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6315     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6316 
6317     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6318       return QualType();
6319 
6320     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6321       return mergeTypes(LHS, getObjCGCQualType(RHS, Qualifiers::Strong));
6322     }
6323     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong && LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6324       return mergeTypes(getObjCGCQualType(LHS, Qualifiers::Strong), RHS);
6325     }
6326     return QualType();
6327   }
6328 
6329   // Okay, qualifiers are equal.
6330 
6331   Type::TypeClass LHSClass = LHSCan->getTypeClass();
6332   Type::TypeClass RHSClass = RHSCan->getTypeClass();
6333 
6334   // We want to consider the two function types to be the same for these
6335   // comparisons, just force one to the other.
6336   if (LHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) LHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6337   if (RHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) RHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6338 
6339   // Same as above for arrays
6340   if (LHSClass == Type::VariableArray || LHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6341     LHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6342   if (RHSClass == Type::VariableArray || RHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6343     RHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6344 
6345   // ObjCInterfaces are just specialized ObjCObjects.
6346   if (LHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) LHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6347   if (RHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) RHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6348 
6349   // Canonicalize ExtVector -> Vector.
6350   if (LHSClass == Type::ExtVector) LHSClass = Type::Vector;
6351   if (RHSClass == Type::ExtVector) RHSClass = Type::Vector;
6352 
6353   // If the canonical type classes don't match.
6354   if (LHSClass != RHSClass) {
6355     // C99 6.7.2.2p4: Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char,
6356     // a signed integer type, or an unsigned integer type.
6357     // Compatibility is based on the underlying type, not the promotion
6358     // type.
6359     if (const EnumType* ETy = LHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6360       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6361       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, RHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6362         return RHS;
6363     }
6364     if (const EnumType* ETy = RHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6365       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6366       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, LHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6367         return LHS;
6368     }
6369     // allow block pointer type to match an 'id' type.
6370     if (OfBlockPointer && !BlockReturnType) {
6371        if (LHS->isObjCIdType() && RHS->isBlockPointerType())
6372          return LHS;
6373       if (RHS->isObjCIdType() && LHS->isBlockPointerType())
6374         return RHS;
6375     }
6376 
6377     return QualType();
6378   }
6379 
6380   // The canonical type classes match.
6381   switch (LHSClass) {
6382 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
6383 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
6384 #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6385 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6386 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6387 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
6388     llvm_unreachable("Non-canonical and dependent types shouldn't get here");
6389 
6390   case Type::LValueReference:
6391   case Type::RValueReference:
6392   case Type::MemberPointer:
6393     llvm_unreachable("C++ should never be in mergeTypes");
6394 
6395   case Type::ObjCInterface:
6396   case Type::IncompleteArray:
6397   case Type::VariableArray:
6398   case Type::FunctionProto:
6399   case Type::ExtVector:
6400     llvm_unreachable("Types are eliminated above");
6401 
6402   case Type::Pointer:
6403   {
6404     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6405     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6406     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6407     if (Unqualified) {
6408       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6409       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6410     }
6411     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, false,
6412                                      Unqualified);
6413     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6414     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6415       return LHS;
6416     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6417       return RHS;
6418     return getPointerType(ResultType);
6419   }
6420   case Type::BlockPointer:
6421   {
6422     // Merge two block pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6423     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6424     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6425     if (Unqualified) {
6426       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6427       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6428     }
6429     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, OfBlockPointer,
6430                                      Unqualified);
6431     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6432     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6433       return LHS;
6434     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6435       return RHS;
6436     return getBlockPointerType(ResultType);
6437   }
6438   case Type::Atomic:
6439   {
6440     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6441     QualType LHSValue = LHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6442     QualType RHSValue = RHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6443     if (Unqualified) {
6444       LHSValue = LHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6445       RHSValue = RHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6446     }
6447     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSValue, RHSValue, false,
6448                                      Unqualified);
6449     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6450     if (getCanonicalType(LHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6451       return LHS;
6452     if (getCanonicalType(RHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6453       return RHS;
6454     return getAtomicType(ResultType);
6455   }
6456   case Type::ConstantArray:
6457   {
6458     const ConstantArrayType* LCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(LHS);
6459     const ConstantArrayType* RCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(RHS);
6460     if (LCAT && RCAT && RCAT->getSize() != LCAT->getSize())
6461       return QualType();
6462 
6463     QualType LHSElem = getAsArrayType(LHS)->getElementType();
6464     QualType RHSElem = getAsArrayType(RHS)->getElementType();
6465     if (Unqualified) {
6466       LHSElem = LHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6467       RHSElem = RHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6468     }
6469 
6470     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSElem, RHSElem, false, Unqualified);
6471     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6472     if (LCAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6473       return LHS;
6474     if (RCAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6475       return RHS;
6476     if (LCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, LCAT->getSize(),
6477                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6478     if (RCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, RCAT->getSize(),
6479                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6480     const VariableArrayType* LVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(LHS);
6481     const VariableArrayType* RVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(RHS);
6482     if (LVAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6483       return LHS;
6484     if (RVAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6485       return RHS;
6486     if (LVAT) {
6487       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6488       // the array's size has to be the size of LHS, but the type
6489       // has to be different.
6490       return LHS;
6491     }
6492     if (RVAT) {
6493       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6494       // the array's size has to be the size of RHS, but the type
6495       // has to be different.
6496       return RHS;
6497     }
6498     if (getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return LHS;
6499     if (getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return RHS;
6500     return getIncompleteArrayType(ResultType,
6501                                   ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6502   }
6503   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
6504     return mergeFunctionTypes(LHS, RHS, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6505   case Type::Record:
6506   case Type::Enum:
6507     return QualType();
6508   case Type::Builtin:
6509     // Only exactly equal builtin types are compatible, which is tested above.
6510     return QualType();
6511   case Type::Complex:
6512     // Distinct complex types are incompatible.
6513     return QualType();
6514   case Type::Vector:
6515     // FIXME: The merged type should be an ExtVector!
6516     if (areCompatVectorTypes(LHSCan->getAs<VectorType>(),
6517                              RHSCan->getAs<VectorType>()))
6518       return LHS;
6519     return QualType();
6520   case Type::ObjCObject: {
6521     // Check if the types are assignment compatible.
6522     // FIXME: This should be type compatibility, e.g. whether
6523     // "LHS x; RHS x;" at global scope is legal.
6524     const ObjCObjectType* LHSIface = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6525     const ObjCObjectType* RHSIface = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6526     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface))
6527       return LHS;
6528 
6529     return QualType();
6530   }
6531   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: {
6532     if (OfBlockPointer) {
6533       if (canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
6534                                           LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6535                                           RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6536                                           BlockReturnType))
6537         return LHS;
6538       return QualType();
6539     }
6540     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6541                                 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()))
6542       return LHS;
6543 
6544     return QualType();
6545   }
6546   }
6547 
6548   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Type::Class!");
6549 }
6550 
6551 bool ASTContext::FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(
6552                    const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType,
6553                    const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType) {
6554   if (FromFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs() !=
6555       ToFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs())
6556     return false;
6557   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo FromEPI =
6558     FromFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6559   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo ToEPI =
6560     ToFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6561   if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments && ToEPI.ConsumedArguments)
6562     for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumArgs();
6563          ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx)  {
6564       if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx] !=
6565           ToEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx])
6566         return false;
6567     }
6568   return true;
6569 }
6570 
6571 /// mergeObjCGCQualifiers - This routine merges ObjC's GC attribute of 'LHS' and
6572 /// 'RHS' attributes and returns the merged version; including for function
6573 /// return types.
6574 QualType ASTContext::mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6575   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6576   RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6577   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6578   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6579     return LHS;
6580   if (RHSCan->isFunctionType()) {
6581     if (!LHSCan->isFunctionType())
6582       return QualType();
6583     QualType OldReturnType =
6584       cast<FunctionType>(RHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6585     QualType NewReturnType =
6586       cast<FunctionType>(LHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6587     QualType ResReturnType =
6588       mergeObjCGCQualifiers(NewReturnType, OldReturnType);
6589     if (ResReturnType.isNull())
6590       return QualType();
6591     if (ResReturnType == NewReturnType || ResReturnType == OldReturnType) {
6592       // id foo(); ... __strong id foo(); or: __strong id foo(); ... id foo();
6593       // In either case, use OldReturnType to build the new function type.
6594       const FunctionType *F = LHS->getAs<FunctionType>();
6595       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(F)) {
6596         FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
6597         EPI.ExtInfo = getFunctionExtInfo(LHS);
6598         QualType ResultType
6599           = getFunctionType(OldReturnType, FPT->arg_type_begin(),
6600                             FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
6601         return ResultType;
6602       }
6603     }
6604     return QualType();
6605   }
6606 
6607   // If the qualifiers are different, the types can still be merged.
6608   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6609   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6610   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6611     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type mismatch.
6612     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6613         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace())
6614       return QualType();
6615 
6616     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6617     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6618     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6619     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6620     // qualified __strong.
6621     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6622     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6623     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6624 
6625     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6626       return QualType();
6627 
6628     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong)
6629       return LHS;
6630     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong)
6631       return RHS;
6632     return QualType();
6633   }
6634 
6635   if (LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType() && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6636     QualType LHSBaseQT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6637     QualType RHSBaseQT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6638     QualType ResQT = mergeObjCGCQualifiers(LHSBaseQT, RHSBaseQT);
6639     if (ResQT == LHSBaseQT)
6640       return LHS;
6641     if (ResQT == RHSBaseQT)
6642       return RHS;
6643   }
6644   return QualType();
6645 }
6646 
6647 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6648 //                         Integer Predicates
6649 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6650 
6651 unsigned ASTContext::getIntWidth(QualType T) const {
6652   if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(T))
6653     T = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6654   if (T->isBooleanType())
6655     return 1;
6656   // For builtin types, just use the standard type sizing method
6657   return (unsigned)getTypeSize(T);
6658 }
6659 
6660 QualType ASTContext::getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) {
6661   assert(T->hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() && "Unexpected type");
6662 
6663   // Turn <4 x signed int> -> <4 x unsigned int>
6664   if (const VectorType *VTy = T->getAs<VectorType>())
6665     return getVectorType(getCorrespondingUnsignedType(VTy->getElementType()),
6666                          VTy->getNumElements(), VTy->getVectorKind());
6667 
6668   // For enums, we return the unsigned version of the base type.
6669   if (const EnumType *ETy = T->getAs<EnumType>())
6670     T = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6671 
6672   const BuiltinType *BTy = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
6673   assert(BTy && "Unexpected signed integer type");
6674   switch (BTy->getKind()) {
6675   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
6676   case BuiltinType::SChar:
6677     return UnsignedCharTy;
6678   case BuiltinType::Short:
6679     return UnsignedShortTy;
6680   case BuiltinType::Int:
6681     return UnsignedIntTy;
6682   case BuiltinType::Long:
6683     return UnsignedLongTy;
6684   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
6685     return UnsignedLongLongTy;
6686   case BuiltinType::Int128:
6687     return UnsignedInt128Ty;
6688   default:
6689     llvm_unreachable("Unexpected signed integer type");
6690   }
6691 }
6692 
6693 ASTMutationListener::~ASTMutationListener() { }
6694 
6695 
6696 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6697 //                          Builtin Type Computation
6698 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6699 
6700 /// DecodeTypeFromStr - This decodes one type descriptor from Str, advancing the
6701 /// pointer over the consumed characters.  This returns the resultant type.  If
6702 /// AllowTypeModifiers is false then modifier like * are not parsed, just basic
6703 /// types.  This allows "v2i*" to be parsed as a pointer to a v2i instead of
6704 /// a vector of "i*".
6705 ///
6706 /// RequiresICE is filled in on return to indicate whether the value is required
6707 /// to be an Integer Constant Expression.
6708 static QualType DecodeTypeFromStr(const char *&Str, const ASTContext &Context,
6709                                   ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
6710                                   bool &RequiresICE,
6711                                   bool AllowTypeModifiers) {
6712   // Modifiers.
6713   int HowLong = 0;
6714   bool Signed = false, Unsigned = false;
6715   RequiresICE = false;
6716 
6717   // Read the prefixed modifiers first.
6718   bool Done = false;
6719   while (!Done) {
6720     switch (*Str++) {
6721     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
6722     case 'I':
6723       RequiresICE = true;
6724       break;
6725     case 'S':
6726       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
6727       assert(!Signed && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
6728       Signed = true;
6729       break;
6730     case 'U':
6731       assert(!Signed && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
6732       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
6733       Unsigned = true;
6734       break;
6735     case 'L':
6736       assert(HowLong <= 2 && "Can't have LLLL modifier");
6737       ++HowLong;
6738       break;
6739     }
6740   }
6741 
6742   QualType Type;
6743 
6744   // Read the base type.
6745   switch (*Str++) {
6746   default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type letter!");
6747   case 'v':
6748     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6749            "Bad modifiers used with 'v'!");
6750     Type = Context.VoidTy;
6751     break;
6752   case 'f':
6753     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6754            "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!");
6755     Type = Context.FloatTy;
6756     break;
6757   case 'd':
6758     assert(HowLong < 2 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6759            "Bad modifiers used with 'd'!");
6760     if (HowLong)
6761       Type = Context.LongDoubleTy;
6762     else
6763       Type = Context.DoubleTy;
6764     break;
6765   case 's':
6766     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 's'!");
6767     if (Unsigned)
6768       Type = Context.UnsignedShortTy;
6769     else
6770       Type = Context.ShortTy;
6771     break;
6772   case 'i':
6773     if (HowLong == 3)
6774       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedInt128Ty : Context.Int128Ty;
6775     else if (HowLong == 2)
6776       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongLongTy : Context.LongLongTy;
6777     else if (HowLong == 1)
6778       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongTy : Context.LongTy;
6779     else
6780       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedIntTy : Context.IntTy;
6781     break;
6782   case 'c':
6783     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 'c'!");
6784     if (Signed)
6785       Type = Context.SignedCharTy;
6786     else if (Unsigned)
6787       Type = Context.UnsignedCharTy;
6788     else
6789       Type = Context.CharTy;
6790     break;
6791   case 'b': // boolean
6792     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'b'!");
6793     Type = Context.BoolTy;
6794     break;
6795   case 'z':  // size_t.
6796     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'z'!");
6797     Type = Context.getSizeType();
6798     break;
6799   case 'F':
6800     Type = Context.getCFConstantStringType();
6801     break;
6802   case 'G':
6803     Type = Context.getObjCIdType();
6804     break;
6805   case 'H':
6806     Type = Context.getObjCSelType();
6807     break;
6808   case 'a':
6809     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
6810     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
6811     break;
6812   case 'A':
6813     // This is a "reference" to a va_list; however, what exactly
6814     // this means depends on how va_list is defined. There are two
6815     // different kinds of va_list: ones passed by value, and ones
6816     // passed by reference.  An example of a by-value va_list is
6817     // x86, where va_list is a char*. An example of by-ref va_list
6818     // is x86-64, where va_list is a __va_list_tag[1]. For x86,
6819     // we want this argument to be a char*&; for x86-64, we want
6820     // it to be a __va_list_tag*.
6821     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
6822     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
6823     if (Type->isArrayType())
6824       Type = Context.getArrayDecayedType(Type);
6825     else
6826       Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
6827     break;
6828   case 'V': {
6829     char *End;
6830     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
6831     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
6832     Str = End;
6833 
6834     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error,
6835                                              RequiresICE, false);
6836     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require vector ICE");
6837 
6838     // TODO: No way to make AltiVec vectors in builtins yet.
6839     Type = Context.getVectorType(ElementType, NumElements,
6840                                  VectorType::GenericVector);
6841     break;
6842   }
6843   case 'E': {
6844     char *End;
6845 
6846     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
6847     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
6848 
6849     Str = End;
6850 
6851     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
6852                                              false);
6853     Type = Context.getExtVectorType(ElementType, NumElements);
6854     break;
6855   }
6856   case 'X': {
6857     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
6858                                              false);
6859     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require complex ICE");
6860     Type = Context.getComplexType(ElementType);
6861     break;
6862   }
6863   case 'Y' : {
6864     Type = Context.getPointerDiffType();
6865     break;
6866   }
6867   case 'P':
6868     Type = Context.getFILEType();
6869     if (Type.isNull()) {
6870       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_stdio;
6871       return QualType();
6872     }
6873     break;
6874   case 'J':
6875     if (Signed)
6876       Type = Context.getsigjmp_bufType();
6877     else
6878       Type = Context.getjmp_bufType();
6879 
6880     if (Type.isNull()) {
6881       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_setjmp;
6882       return QualType();
6883     }
6884     break;
6885   case 'K':
6886     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'K'!");
6887     Type = Context.getucontext_tType();
6888 
6889     if (Type.isNull()) {
6890       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_ucontext;
6891       return QualType();
6892     }
6893     break;
6894   }
6895 
6896   // If there are modifiers and if we're allowed to parse them, go for it.
6897   Done = !AllowTypeModifiers;
6898   while (!Done) {
6899     switch (char c = *Str++) {
6900     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
6901     case '*':
6902     case '&': {
6903       // Both pointers and references can have their pointee types
6904       // qualified with an address space.
6905       char *End;
6906       unsigned AddrSpace = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
6907       if (End != Str && AddrSpace != 0) {
6908         Type = Context.getAddrSpaceQualType(Type, AddrSpace);
6909         Str = End;
6910       }
6911       if (c == '*')
6912         Type = Context.getPointerType(Type);
6913       else
6914         Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
6915       break;
6916     }
6917     // FIXME: There's no way to have a built-in with an rvalue ref arg.
6918     case 'C':
6919       Type = Type.withConst();
6920       break;
6921     case 'D':
6922       Type = Context.getVolatileType(Type);
6923       break;
6924     case 'R':
6925       Type = Type.withRestrict();
6926       break;
6927     }
6928   }
6929 
6930   assert((!RequiresICE || Type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) &&
6931          "Integer constant 'I' type must be an integer");
6932 
6933   return Type;
6934 }
6935 
6936 /// GetBuiltinType - Return the type for the specified builtin.
6937 QualType ASTContext::GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id,
6938                                     GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
6939                                     unsigned *IntegerConstantArgs) const {
6940   const char *TypeStr = BuiltinInfo.GetTypeString(Id);
6941 
6942   SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes;
6943 
6944   bool RequiresICE = false;
6945   Error = GE_None;
6946   QualType ResType = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error,
6947                                        RequiresICE, true);
6948   if (Error != GE_None)
6949     return QualType();
6950 
6951   assert(!RequiresICE && "Result of intrinsic cannot be required to be an ICE");
6952 
6953   while (TypeStr[0] && TypeStr[0] != '.') {
6954     QualType Ty = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, RequiresICE, true);
6955     if (Error != GE_None)
6956       return QualType();
6957 
6958     // If this argument is required to be an IntegerConstantExpression and the
6959     // caller cares, fill in the bitmask we return.
6960     if (RequiresICE && IntegerConstantArgs)
6961       *IntegerConstantArgs |= 1 << ArgTypes.size();
6962 
6963     // Do array -> pointer decay.  The builtin should use the decayed type.
6964     if (Ty->isArrayType())
6965       Ty = getArrayDecayedType(Ty);
6966 
6967     ArgTypes.push_back(Ty);
6968   }
6969 
6970   assert((TypeStr[0] != '.' || TypeStr[1] == 0) &&
6971          "'.' should only occur at end of builtin type list!");
6972 
6973   FunctionType::ExtInfo EI;
6974   if (BuiltinInfo.isNoReturn(Id)) EI = EI.withNoReturn(true);
6975 
6976   bool Variadic = (TypeStr[0] == '.');
6977 
6978   // We really shouldn't be making a no-proto type here, especially in C++.
6979   if (ArgTypes.empty() && Variadic)
6980     return getFunctionNoProtoType(ResType, EI);
6981 
6982   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI;
6983   EPI.ExtInfo = EI;
6984   EPI.Variadic = Variadic;
6985 
6986   return getFunctionType(ResType, ArgTypes.data(), ArgTypes.size(), EPI);
6987 }
6988 
6989 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl *FD) {
6990   GVALinkage External = GVA_StrongExternal;
6991 
6992   Linkage L = FD->getLinkage();
6993   switch (L) {
6994   case NoLinkage:
6995   case InternalLinkage:
6996   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
6997     return GVA_Internal;
6998 
6999   case ExternalLinkage:
7000     switch (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) {
7001     case TSK_Undeclared:
7002     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7003       External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7004       break;
7005 
7006     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7007       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7008 
7009     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7010     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7011       External = GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7012       break;
7013     }
7014   }
7015 
7016   if (!FD->isInlined())
7017     return External;
7018 
7019   if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus || FD->hasAttr<GNUInlineAttr>()) {
7020     // GNU or C99 inline semantics. Determine whether this symbol should be
7021     // externally visible.
7022     if (FD->isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible())
7023       return External;
7024 
7025     // C99 inline semantics, where the symbol is not externally visible.
7026     return GVA_C99Inline;
7027   }
7028 
7029   // C++0x [temp.explicit]p9:
7030   //   [ Note: The intent is that an inline function that is the subject of
7031   //   an explicit instantiation declaration will still be implicitly
7032   //   instantiated when used so that the body can be considered for
7033   //   inlining, but that no out-of-line copy of the inline function would be
7034   //   generated in the translation unit. -- end note ]
7035   if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()
7036                                        == TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration)
7037     return GVA_C99Inline;
7038 
7039   return GVA_CXXInline;
7040 }
7041 
7042 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl *VD) {
7043   // If this is a static data member, compute the kind of template
7044   // specialization. Otherwise, this variable is not part of a
7045   // template.
7046   TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = TSK_Undeclared;
7047   if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
7048     TSK = VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind();
7049 
7050   Linkage L = VD->getLinkage();
7051   if (L == ExternalLinkage && getLangOpts().CPlusPlus &&
7052       VD->getType()->getLinkage() == UniqueExternalLinkage)
7053     L = UniqueExternalLinkage;
7054 
7055   switch (L) {
7056   case NoLinkage:
7057   case InternalLinkage:
7058   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7059     return GVA_Internal;
7060 
7061   case ExternalLinkage:
7062     switch (TSK) {
7063     case TSK_Undeclared:
7064     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7065       return GVA_StrongExternal;
7066 
7067     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7068       llvm_unreachable("Variable should not be instantiated");
7069       // Fall through to treat this like any other instantiation.
7070 
7071     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7072       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7073 
7074     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7075       return GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7076     }
7077   }
7078 
7079   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Linkage!");
7080 }
7081 
7082 bool ASTContext::DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl *D) {
7083   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
7084     if (!VD->isFileVarDecl())
7085       return false;
7086   } else if (!isa<FunctionDecl>(D))
7087     return false;
7088 
7089   // Weak references don't produce any output by themselves.
7090   if (D->hasAttr<WeakRefAttr>())
7091     return false;
7092 
7093   // Aliases and used decls are required.
7094   if (D->hasAttr<AliasAttr>() || D->hasAttr<UsedAttr>())
7095     return true;
7096 
7097   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
7098     // Forward declarations aren't required.
7099     if (!FD->doesThisDeclarationHaveABody())
7100       return FD->doesDeclarationForceExternallyVisibleDefinition();
7101 
7102     // Constructors and destructors are required.
7103     if (FD->hasAttr<ConstructorAttr>() || FD->hasAttr<DestructorAttr>())
7104       return true;
7105 
7106     // The key function for a class is required.
7107     if (const CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FD)) {
7108       const CXXRecordDecl *RD = MD->getParent();
7109       if (MD->isOutOfLine() && RD->isDynamicClass()) {
7110         const CXXMethodDecl *KeyFunc = getKeyFunction(RD);
7111         if (KeyFunc && KeyFunc->getCanonicalDecl() == MD->getCanonicalDecl())
7112           return true;
7113       }
7114     }
7115 
7116     GVALinkage Linkage = GetGVALinkageForFunction(FD);
7117 
7118     // static, static inline, always_inline, and extern inline functions can
7119     // always be deferred.  Normal inline functions can be deferred in C99/C++.
7120     // Implicit template instantiations can also be deferred in C++.
7121     if (Linkage == GVA_Internal  || Linkage == GVA_C99Inline ||
7122         Linkage == GVA_CXXInline || Linkage == GVA_TemplateInstantiation)
7123       return false;
7124     return true;
7125   }
7126 
7127   const VarDecl *VD = cast<VarDecl>(D);
7128   assert(VD->isFileVarDecl() && "Expected file scoped var");
7129 
7130   if (VD->isThisDeclarationADefinition() == VarDecl::DeclarationOnly)
7131     return false;
7132 
7133   // Structs that have non-trivial constructors or destructors are required.
7134 
7135   // FIXME: Handle references.
7136   // FIXME: Be more selective about which constructors we care about.
7137   if (const RecordType *RT = VD->getType()->getAs<RecordType>()) {
7138     if (const CXXRecordDecl *RD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl())) {
7139       if (RD->hasDefinition() && !(RD->hasTrivialDefaultConstructor() &&
7140                                    RD->hasTrivialCopyConstructor() &&
7141                                    RD->hasTrivialMoveConstructor() &&
7142                                    RD->hasTrivialDestructor()))
7143         return true;
7144     }
7145   }
7146 
7147   GVALinkage L = GetGVALinkageForVariable(VD);
7148   if (L == GVA_Internal || L == GVA_TemplateInstantiation) {
7149     if (!(VD->getInit() && VD->getInit()->HasSideEffects(*this)))
7150       return false;
7151   }
7152 
7153   return true;
7154 }
7155 
7156 CallingConv ASTContext::getDefaultCXXMethodCallConv(bool isVariadic) {
7157   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7158   return ABI->getDefaultMethodCallConv(isVariadic);
7159 }
7160 
7161 CallingConv ASTContext::getCanonicalCallConv(CallingConv CC) const {
7162   if (CC == CC_C && !LangOpts.MRTD && getTargetInfo().getCXXABI() != CXXABI_Microsoft)
7163     return CC_Default;
7164   return CC;
7165 }
7166 
7167 bool ASTContext::isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl *RD) const {
7168   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7169   return ABI->isNearlyEmpty(RD);
7170 }
7171 
7172 MangleContext *ASTContext::createMangleContext() {
7173   switch (Target->getCXXABI()) {
7174   case CXXABI_ARM:
7175   case CXXABI_Itanium:
7176     return createItaniumMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7177   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
7178     return createMicrosoftMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7179   }
7180   llvm_unreachable("Unsupported ABI");
7181 }
7182 
7183 CXXABI::~CXXABI() {}
7184 
7185 size_t ASTContext::getSideTableAllocatedMemory() const {
7186   return ASTRecordLayouts.getMemorySize()
7187     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCLayouts)
7188     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(KeyFunctions)
7189     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCImpls)
7190     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(BlockVarCopyInits)
7191     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(DeclAttrs)
7192     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember)
7193     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingDecl)
7194     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl)
7195     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl)
7196     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(OverriddenMethods)
7197     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(Types)
7198     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(VariableArrayTypes)
7199     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ClassScopeSpecializationPattern);
7200 }
7201 
7202 unsigned ASTContext::getLambdaManglingNumber(CXXMethodDecl *CallOperator) {
7203   CXXRecordDecl *Lambda = CallOperator->getParent();
7204   return LambdaMangleContexts[Lambda->getDeclContext()]
7205            .getManglingNumber(CallOperator);
7206 }
7207 
7208 
7209 void ASTContext::setParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D, unsigned int index) {
7210   ParamIndices[D] = index;
7211 }
7212 
7213 unsigned ASTContext::getParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D) const {
7214   ParameterIndexTable::const_iterator I = ParamIndices.find(D);
7215   assert(I != ParamIndices.end() &&
7216          "ParmIndices lacks entry set by ParmVarDecl");
7217   return I->second;
7218 }
7219